2012 Altima Owner Manual

®

2012 ALTIMAOWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2012 N

ISS

AN

ALTIM

AL3

2-D

L32-D

Printing : February 2012 (20)

Publication No.: OM0E 0L32U2

Printed in U.S.A.

OM2E 0L32U2

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

In addition to factory installed options, your ve-hicle may also be equipped with additional ac-cessories installed by NISSAN or by yourNISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is importantthat you familiarize yourself with all disclosures,warnings, cautions and instructions concerningproper use of such accessories prior to operatingthe vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSANdealer for details concerning the particular ac-cessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read thisOwner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-iarity with controls and maintenance require-ments, assisting you in the safe operation of yourvehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS give your full attention to drivingand avoid using vehicle features or takingother actions that could distract you.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Preteenchildren should be seated in the rear seat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect itsperformance, safety or durability, andmay even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting from modi-fications may not be covered underNISSAN warranties.

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORYSome vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries,may contain perchlorate material. The fol-lowing advisory is provided: “PerchlorateMaterial – special handling may apply, Seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.and licensed toVisteon and Clarion.

XM Radio� requiressubscription, soldseparately. Not avail-able in Alaska, Hawaiior Guam. For moreinformation, visitwww.xmradio.com. © 2011 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments orquestions, please contact the NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs Department using our toll-freenumber:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

For U.S. [email protected]

For Canadian [email protected]

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-12

1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-26)2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-13)3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-40)4. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-40)5. Head Restraints (P. 1-9)6. Front seat belts (P. 1-13)7. Side-impact pressure sensor (driver’s

side shown; passenger’s side similar)(P. 1-55)

8. Supplemental front-impact air bags(P. 1-40)

9. Seats (P. 1-2)10. Occupant classification sensor

(pattern sensor) (P. 1-49)11. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-54)12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P. 1-24)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII2001

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

Coupe

1. Power windows (P. 2-43)2. Windshield (P. 8-21)3. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-27)4. Engine hood (P. 3-24)5. Tie down (P. 6-14)6. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-34)7. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-29)8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)9. Tire pressure (P. 8-38)10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)11. Tire chains (P. 8-46)12. Mirrors (P. 3-30)13. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key ™ ,

keys (P. 3-4, 3-6, 3-2)

LII0114

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

Sedan

1. Power windows (P. 2-43)2. Windshield (P. 8-21)3. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-27)4. Engine hood (P. 3-24)5. Tie down (P. 6-14)6. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-34)7. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-29)8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)9. Tire pressure (P. 8-38)10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)11. Tire chains (P. 8-46)12. Mirrors (P. 3-30)13. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key ™ ,

keys (P. 3-4, 3-6, 3-2)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0094


Coupe

1. Rear window and outside mirror(if so equipped) defroster switch(P. 2-28)

2. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-25)3. Trunk lid (P. 3-24)4. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)5. Opener operation (P. 3-24)6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-26, P. 9-3)8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-26)

WII0125

EXTERIOR REAR


Sedan

1. Rear window and outside mirror(if so equipped) defroster switch(P. 2-28)

2. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-25)3. Trunk lid (P. 3-24)4. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)5. Opener operation (P. 3-24)6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-26, P. 9-3)8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-26)9. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-6)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0095


1. Interior trunk access (P. 1-8)2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-46)3. Sun visors (P. 3-29)4. Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-49)5. HomeLink� universal transceiver

(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)6. Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) (P. 3-30)7. Glove box (P. 2-41)8. Cup holders (P. 2-39)9. Console box (P. 2-41)10. Front seat (P. 1-2)11. Rear seat (P. 1-8)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0126

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT


1. Vents (P. 4-18)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-29)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped)/Bluetooth� Hands-freePhone System (if so equipped)(P. 4-104, P. 4-100, P. 4-114)

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn(P. 1-40, P. 2-35)

6. Cruise control main/set switch(P. 5-20)

7. Windshield wiper and washer switch(P. 2-27)

8. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)9. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-34)10. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-50)11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-40)12. Glove box (P. 2-41)13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)14. Covered storage box (P. 2-42)15. Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(P. 4-26)16. Heater and air conditioner (manual)

(P. 4-19)17. Shift selector (P. 5-12)18. Audio system controls (if so equipped)/

Storage (if so equipped)(P. 4-29, P.2-42)

19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls(P. 3-29)

WIC1598

INSTRUMENT PANEL


20. Vehicle information display controls(P. 2-17)

21. Hood release (P. 3-24)22. Trunk opener (P. 3-24)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P. 2-36)NISSAN Intelligent Key™ port (P. 5-7)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.


QR25DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-15, 8-15)4. Air cleaner (P. 8-20)5. Fuse block (P. 8-23)6. Battery (P. 8-16)7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)10. Drive belt location (P. 8-18)11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-15)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LDI0553

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


VQ35DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-15, 8-15)4. Air cleaner (P. 8-20)5. Fuse block (P. 8-23)6. Battery (P. 8-16)7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)10. Drive belt location (P. 8-18)11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-15)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LDI0552


Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS) warn-ing light

2-11

or

Brake warning light 2-11

Charge warninglight

2-11

Continuously Vari-able Transmission(CVT) check warn-ing light (if soequipped)

2-12

Engine oil pressurewarning light

2-12

Warninglight

Name Page

Low tire pressurewarning light

2-12

Master warning light 2-13

Seat belt warninglight and chime

2-14

Supplemental airbag warning light

2-14

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Continuously Vari-able Transmission(CVT) position indi-cator light (if soequipped)

2-14

Cruise main switchindicator light

2-15

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Cruise set switchindicator light

2-15

Front passenger airbag status light

2-15

High beam indicatorlight (blue)

2-15

Malfunction Indica-tor Light (MIL)

2-15

Security indicatorlight

2-27

Slip indicator light 2-16

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

2-16

Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) OFFindicator light

2-16

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS


1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front power seat adjustment(if so equipped for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Rear-facing child restraint installation usingLATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Rear-facing child restraint installation usingthe seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Forward-facing child restraint installationusing LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31Forward-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33Installing top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat properly. See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” later in thissection.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

● The seatback should not be reclinedany more than needed for comfort. Seatbelts are most effective when the pas-senger sits well back and straight up inthe seat. If the seatback is reclined, therisk of sliding under the lap belt andbeing injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, besure not to contact any moving parts toavoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward and backwardPull the center of the bar up and hold it while youslide the seat forward or backward to the desiredposition. Release the bar to lock the seat inposition.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N(Neutral) position with the parking brake fullyapplied.

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjustthe seat height until the desired position isachieved.

WRS0738 WRS0739 WRS0740

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT(if so equipped for driver’s seat)

Operating tips

WARNING

Before driving the vehicle, return the seat-back to an upright seating position aftermanually releasing it. Also, make sure theseat is locked in place. Failure to do somay cause the seat to move in a collisionor sudden stop. This may result in damageto the seat or personal injury.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the power recline switchwhen the seatback has been manuallyreleased using the upper seatback re-lease lever �1 . Doing so can damagethe seat.

● Do not pull on the upper seatback re-lease lever or the trim to return theseatback to a normal seating position.Doing so may damage the seat.

● The power seat motor has an auto-resetoverload protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 seconds,then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for along period of time when the engine is off.This will discharge the battery.

● Pull up on the upper seatback release lever torelease the seatback only. Push the seatbackforward to allow for access to items behind thefront seat. Push the seatback to the rear of thevehicle to return the seatback to the uprightand locked position. The upper seatback re-lease lever does not need to be used.

CoupeWRS0841


Forward and backwardMoving the switch forward or backward will slidethe seat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

RecliningMove the recline switch backward until the de-sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatbackforward again, move the switch forward andmove your body forward. The seatback will moveforward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section). Also, the seatback can be re-clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P(Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parkingbrake fully applied.

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Pull the lever up or push down to adjust the angleand height of the seat cushion.

SedanWRS0751

Coupe shown, Sedan similarWRS0842


Lumbar support (if so equipped fordriver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Push the switch (Type A)forward or backward or move the lever (Type B)up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

Entry to the rear seat from outside ofthe vehicle (if so equipped for Coupemodels)Pull the seat recliner lever to the uppermost po-sition folding the seatback forward, releasing theseat track.

Slide the entire seat forward for access to therear seat.

To return the seat to a locked position:

Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat-back and track are locked.

Type AWRS0743

Type BWRS0843 WRS0739


Operating tips:

● The seatback and track will not lock until theseatback is returned rearward.

● The seatback will return to the first lockingnotch when using the seat recliner lever.

CAUTION

● When returning the seat to its originalposition, confirm that the seat and seat-back are locked properly.

● Be careful not to pinch your hand orfoot or bump your head when operatingthe walk-in seat.

Exiting from the rear seat on thepassenger’s side, using the upperseatback release lever (if so equippedfor Coupe models)Pull the upper seatback release lever �1 to theuppermost position, folding the seatback forward�2 , releasing the seat track.

Slide the entire seat forward to exit from the rearseat.

To return the seat to a locked position:

Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat-back and track are locked.

Operating tips:

● The seatback and track will not lock until theseat back is returned rearward.

● The seatback will return to an upright seatingposition if the upper seatback release leveris pulled to the uppermost position.

CAUTION

● When returning the seat to its originalposition, confirm that the seat and seat-back are locked properly.

● Be careful not to pinch your hand orfoot or bump your head when operatingthe walk-in seat.

WRS0791


FOLDING REAR SEAT

Interior trunk access

The trunk can be accessed from the passengerside of the rear seat for loading and unloading, asshown.

1. Open the access cover on the rear parcelshelf.

2. Push down on the button on the rear parcelshelf.

3. Fold down the passenger’s side seatback.

To remove or reinstall the seatback release but-ton access covers, see “Upper tether anchor/keycylinder covers” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areasby passengers without proper restraintscould result in serious injury in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with the rearseatback and trunk lid securely latchedwhen not in use, and prevent children’saccess to car keys.

WRS0794


To fold down the driver’s side of the rear seat,reach through the opening and pull on the strap�1 located behind the seat.

The rear seats can be locked using the mechani-cal key to prevent unauthorized access. For moreinformation on keys, refer to “Keys” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of thismanual.

Center armrest (if so equipped)

Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other ve-hicle safety systems. They may provideadditional protection against injury in cer-tain rear end collisions. Adjust the headrestraints properly, as specified in thissection. Check the adjustment aftersomeone else uses the seat. Do not attachanything to the head restraint stalks orremove the head restraint. Do not use theseat if the head restraint has been re-moved. If the head restraint was removed,reinstall and properly adjust the head re-straint before an occupant uses the seat-ing position. Failure to follow these in-structions can reduce the effectiveness ofthe head restraints. This may increase therisk of serious injury or death in acollision.

WRS0745 WRS0167


The illustration shows the seating positionsequipped with head restraints. All of the headrestraints are adjustable.

� Indicates the seating position is equipped witha head restraint.

Components1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

5. Release knob

AdjustmentAdjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of the seat occupant’s ears.

LRS0893 WRS0921 WRS0134


To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and pushthe head restraint down.

RemovalUse the following procedure to remove the ad-justable head restraints.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highestposition.

2. Push and hold the lock knob and releaseknob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not

loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-straint before an occupant uses the seatingposition.

LRS0888 LRS0889 WRS0922


Install1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes

in the seat. Make sure the head restraint isfacing the correct direction.

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push thehead restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint before anoccupant uses the seating position.

Front-seat Active Head RestraintsThe Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-ing the force that the seatback receives from theoccupant in a rear-end collision. The movementof the head restraint helps support the occu-pant’s head by reducing its backward movementand helping absorb some of the forces that maylead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisionsat low to medium speeds in which it is said thatwhiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original position.

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly asdescribed in this section.

LRS2026 SPA1025


PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat with both feet on the floor, your chancesof being injured or killed in an accident and/or theseverity of injury may be greatly reduced.NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS


WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016


WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never put the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● No changes should be made to the seatbelt system. For example, do not modifythe seat belt, add material, or installdevices that may change the seat beltrouting or tension. Doing so may affectthe operation of the seat belt system.Modifying or tampering with the seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.

● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-vated, it cannot be reused and must bereplaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of preten-sioner system components should bedone by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

SSS0014


PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug andalways position the lap belt as low as possiblearound the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulderbelt over your shoulder and across your chest.Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-dominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat belt properly.

● Do not allow children to play with theseat belts. Most seating positions areequipped with Automatic Locking Re-tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If theseat belt becomes wrapped around achild’s neck with the ALR mode acti-vated, the child can be seriously injuredor killed if the seat belt retracts andbecomes tight. This can occur even ifthe vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seatbelt to release the child. If the seat beltcannot be unbuckled or is already un-buckled, release the child by cutting theseat belt with a suitable tool (such as aknife or scissors) to release the seatbelt.

Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

Manual front seat shownWRS0738


�2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock dur-ing a sudden stop or on impact. Aslow pulling motion permits the seatbelt to move, and allows you somefreedom of movement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Thensmoothly pull the belt out of the re-tractor.

�3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

�4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seatingpositions’ three-point seat belts have two modesof operation:

● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modeallows the seat belt to extend and retract to allowthe driver and passengers some freedom ofmovement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat beltwhen the vehicle slows down rapidly or duringcertain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for childrestraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat beltcannot be extended again until the seat belttongue is detached from the buckle and fullyretracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR modeafter the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-straints” later in this section for more information.

The ALR mode should be used only forchild restraint installation. During normalseat belt use by an occupant, the ALR modeshould not be activated. If it is activated, itmay cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-sion.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

LRS0594 LRS0595


Unfastening the seat belts

�1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows:

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

Shoulder belt height adjustment(Sedan, front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section. Toadjust, pull out the adjustment button �1 andmove the shoulder belt anchor to the desiredposition �2 , so the belt passes over the center ofthe shoulder. The belt should be away from yourface and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-der belt anchor into position.

WRS0139 LRS0242


WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

Shoulder belt guide (Coupe)

The shoulder arm can be adjusted to allow easieraccess to the shoulder belt. The arm can also befolded down to allow rear seat passengers easieraccess.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender that is compatible withthe installed seat belts is available that can bepurchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in(200 mm) of length and may be used for eitherthe driver or front passenger seating position.

See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-chasing an extender if an extender is required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply amild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

LRS0821


● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in thismanual, child safety information is available frommany other sources, including doctors, teachers,government traffic safety offices, and communityorganizations. Every child is different, so be sureto learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraintsystems:

● Rear-facing child restraint

● Forward-facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facingchild restraints. Forward-facing child restraintsare available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.Booster seats are used to help position a vehiclelap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longeruse a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt may cometoo close to the face or neck. The lap beltmay not fit over their small hip bones. In anaccident, an improperly fitting seat beltcould cause serious or fatal injury. Alwaysuse appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraintsfor infants and small children. See “Child re-straints” later in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle byusing either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seatbelt. See the “Child restraints” section for moreinformation.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.Studies show that children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat than inthe front seat.

This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (air bag system) for the front passen-ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”later in this section.

CHILD SAFETY


INFANTSInfants up to at least 1 year old should be placedin a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-mends that infants be placed in child restraintsthat comply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. You should choose a child restraintthat fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDRENChildren that are over 1 year old and weigh atleast 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facingchild restraint as long as possible up to the heightor weight limit of the child restraint. Forward-facing child restraints are available for childrenwho outgrow rear-facing child restraints and areat least 1 year old. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for minimum and maximum weightand height recommendations. NISSAN recom-mends that small children be placed in childrestraints that comply with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose a childrestraint that fits your vehicle and always followthe manufacturer’s instructions for installationand use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided. The seat belt may not fitproperly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used toobtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in acommercially available booster seat if the shoul-der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lapportion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-men. The booster seat should raise the child sothat the shoulder belt is properly positionedacross the top, middle portion of the shoulderand the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seatcan only be used in seating positions that have athree-point type seat belt. The booster seatshould fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-fying that it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. Once the child has grown sothe shoulder belt is no longer on or near the faceand neck, use the shoulder belt without thebooster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoarea. The child could be seriously injuredor killed in a sudden stop or collision.


PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

● Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use and installa-tion of child restraints could result inserious injury or death of a child orother passengers in a sudden stop orcollision:

– The child restraint must be used andinstalled properly. Always follow allof the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions for installation and use.

– Infants and children should never beheld on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-gest adult cannot resist the forces ofa collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both achild and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all childrestraints be installed in the rearseat. Studies show that children aresafer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat. If youmust install a forward-facing childrestraint in the front seat, see“Forward-facing child restraint in-stallation using the seat belts” laterin this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the frontseat. An inflating air bag could seri-ously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only beused in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraintthat will fit the child and vehicle.Some child restraints may not fitproperly in your vehicle.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS


– Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand loads from childrestraints that are properly fitted.

– Never use the anchor points for adultseat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tetherstrap should not be used in the frontpassenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should alwaysbe placed in an appropriate child re-straint while in the vehicle.

● When the child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH systemor a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, loose objects can injure occu-pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle canbecome very hot. Check the seating sur-face and buckles before placing a child inthe child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal childrestraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem. Some child restraints include rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can be con-nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible childrestraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints forinfants and children of various sizes. When se-lecting any child restraint, keep the followingpoints in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height and weight.Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated. Canadian law requires thetop tether strap on forward-facing childrestraints be secured to the designated an-chor point on the vehicle.


LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchorpoints that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchorsand Tethers for CHildren) system compatiblechild restraints. This system may also be referredto as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.With this system, you do not have to use a vehicleseat belt to secure the child restraint.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-tions for proper use and installation ofchild restraints could result in serious in-jury or death of a child or other passen-gers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatiblechild restraints only at the locationsshown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position usingthe LATCH lower anchors. The childrestraint will not be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-ing your fingers into the lower anchorarea. Feel to make sure there are noobstructions over the anchors suchas seat belt webbing or seat cushionmaterial. The child restraint will notbe secured properly if the lower an-chors are obstructed.

LATCH lower anchor locationThe LATCH lower anchors are located at the rearof the seat cushion near the seatback. A label isattached to the seatback to help you locate theLATCH lower anchors.

LATCH system lower anchor locationsWRS0795

LATCH lower anchor locationWRS0700


Installing child restraint LATCH loweranchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include tworigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt tosecure the child restraint. Check your child re-straint for a label stating that it is compatible withLATCH. This information may also be in the in-structions provided by the child restraint manu-facturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint.

(if so equipped)WRS0829

LATCH webbing-mounted attachmentLRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachmentLRS0662


Top tether anchor point locationsThe child restraint top tether strap must be usedwhen installing the child restraint with the LATCHlower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “In-stalling top tether strap” later in this section.

If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap, consult your NISSANdealer for details.

Anchor points �1 are located on the rear parcelshelf.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING LATCHRefer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the LATCH system:

1. If the rear seat cushion has a flap �1 , pull theflap down to allow access to the anchors �2 .

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

WRS0797

(if so equipped)LRS0824

Rear-facing web-mounted – step 3WRS0801


3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

4. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing-mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourhand to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

5. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch (25mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the restraint isnot secure, tighten the LATCH attachmentas necessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint or try installing byusing the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-hicles.

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 3WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 4LRS0673



6. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 2through 5.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING THE SEATBELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) must be usedwhen installing a child restraint. Failure touse the ALR mode will result in the childrestraint not being properly secured. Therestraint could tip over or be loose andcause injury to a child in a sudden stop orcollision. Also, it can change the opera-tion of the front passenger air bag. See“Front passenger air bag and status light”later in this section.

WRS0256


Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Childsafety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rearseats:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to theEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

Rear-facing – step 1WRS0256




4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint to compressthe vehicle seat cushion and seatback whilepulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the belt holds the restraint in place.If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You may needto try a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.





7. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraintmode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGLATCHRefer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facingchild restraint using the LATCH system:

1. If the rear seat cushion has a flap �1 , pull theflap down to allow access to the anchors �2 .


(if so equipped)LRS0824


3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. See “Installing top tether strap” in thissection. Do not install child restraints thatrequire the use of a top tether strap in seat-ing positions that do not have a top tetheranchor.

4. The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper child restraint fit, try anotherseating position or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing web-mounted – step 3WRS0799

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 3WRS0800


5. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing-mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

6. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

7. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch (25mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the restraint isnot secure, tighten the LATCH attachmentas necessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

8. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 2through 7.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) must be usedwhen installing a child restraint. Failure touse the ALR mode will result in the childrestraint not being properly secured. Therestraint could tip over or be loose andcause injury to a child in a sudden stop orcollision. Also, it can change the opera-tion of the front passenger air bag. See“Front passenger air bag and status light”later in this section.

Forward-facing – step 5LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 7WRS0697


Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat belt in therear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position. Childrestraints for infants must be used inthe rear-facing direction and, there-fore, must not be used in the front seat.


The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.If the head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall thehead restraint when the child restraintis removed. See “Head restraints” in thissection for head restraint adjustment, re-moval and installation information.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper child restraint fit, try anotherseating position or a different child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint (rear seat installation only). See “In-stalling top tether strap” in this section. Donot install child restraints that require the useof a top tether strap in seating positions thatdo not have a top tether anchor.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –step 1

WRS0699



4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts toEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.





8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the belt holds the restraint in place.If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You may needto try a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switch inthe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light should illuminate. If thislight is not illuminated see “Front passengerair bag and status light” in this section.Move the child restraint to anotherseating position. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-straint mode) is canceled.




INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAPFirst, secure the child restraint with the LATCHlower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)or the seat belt, as applicable.

1. Flip up the anchor cover �1 from the anchorpoint which is located directly behind thechild seat.

2. Position the top tether strap over the top ofthe seatback �2 .

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint on the rear parcel shelf �3 .

4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in-stallation procedure steps in this sectionbefore tightening the tether strap.

To remove or reinstall the tether anchor covers,see “Upper tether anchor/key cylinder covers” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap, consult your NISSANdealer for details.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not usedproperly, the risk of a child being injuredin a sudden stop or collision greatlyincreases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion ofthe belt is away from the child’s faceand neck and the lap portion of thebelt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is notbehind the child or under the child’sarm.

– A booster seat must only be installedin a seating position that has alap/shoulder belt.

LRS0798 LRS0455


Booster seats of various sizes are offered byseveral manufacturers. When selecting anybooster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. For example, if alow back booster seat �1 is chosen, thevehicle seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seatback islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat �2 should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with yourvehicle, place the child in the booster seatand check the various adjustments to besure the booster seat is compatible with thechild. Always follow all recommended pro-cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

The instructions in this section apply to boosterseat installation in the rear seats or the frontpassenger seat.

LRS0453 LRS0464


Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in theAutomatic Locking Retractor mode whenusing a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”sections before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in therear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front-facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable.If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. Ifthe head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall thehead restraint when the booster seat isremoved. See “Head restraints” in this sec-tion for head restraint adjustment, removaland installation information.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper booster seat fit, try anotherseating position or a different booster seat.

WRS0699Front passenger position

LRS0454


4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting theseat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in “Three-point type seat belt withretractor” earlier in this section. 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch inthe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light may or may not illuminate,depending on the size of the child and thetype of booster seat being used. See “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe following systems:

● Driver and passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air BagSystem)

● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag

● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-mental air bag

● Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag system: This system can helpcushion the impact force to the chest and pelvicarea of the driver and front passenger in certainside-impact collisions. The side air bags are de-signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted.

WRS0475

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM


Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-mental air bag system: This system can helpcushion the impact force to the head of occu-pants in front and rear outboard seating positionsin certain side-impact collisions. The curtain airbags are designed to inflate on the side wherethe vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the driver and front passenger seat beltsand are not a substitute for them. Seat beltsshould always be correctly worn and the occu-pant seated a suitable distance away from thesteering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section forinstructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is placed in theON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

● The front air bags ordinarily will notinflate in the event of a side impact, rearimpact, rollover, or lower severity fron-tal collision. Always wear your seatbelts to help reduce the risk or severityof injury in various kinds of accidents.

● The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in thissection.

● The seat belts and the front air bags aremost effective when you are sitting wellback and upright in the seat. The frontair bags inflate with great force. Evenwith the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem, if you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of posi-tion in any way, you are at greater risk ofinjury or death in a crash. You may alsoreceive serious or fatal injuries from thefront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back againstthe seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

WRS0031


● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. TheAdvanced Air Bag System monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags asneeded. Failure to properly wear seatbelts can increase the risk or severity ofinjury in an accident.

● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pattern sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under someconditions. This sensor is only used inthis seat. Failure to be properly seatedand wearing the seat belt can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent. See “Front passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when the frontair bag inflates.

ARS1133


WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043


WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain air bags inflate if theyare not properly restrained. Pre-teensand children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat, if possible.

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating front air bag could seriously in-jure or kill your child. See “Child re-straints” earlier in this section fordetails.

ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046


WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bags and roof-mounted curtainside-impact supplemental air bags:

● The side air bags and curtain air bagsordinarily will not inflate in the event ofa frontal impact, rear impact, rollover orlower severity side collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reduce therisk or severity of injury in various kindsof accidents.

WARNING

● The seat belts, the side air bags andcurtain air bags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat with both feet on the floor. Theside air bag and curtain air bag inflatewith great force. Do not allow anyone toplace their hand, leg or face near theside air bag on the side of the seatbackof the front seat or near the side roofrails. Do not allow anyone sitting in thefront seats or rear outboard seats toextend their hand out of the window orlean against the door. Some examplesof dangerous riding positions areshown in the previous illustrations. WARNING

● When sitting in the rear seat, do nothold onto the seatback of the front seat.If the side air bag inflates, you may beseriously injured. Be especially carefulwith children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere with sideair bag inflation.

SSS0101 WRS0032


SSS0159 SSS0162


CoupeLRS2057


1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bag inflators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bags

3. Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag modules

4. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)5. Side-impact pressure sensor (driver’s

side shown; passenger’s side similar)6. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules7. Crash zone sensor8. Seat belt buckle switches on driver’s

and passenger’s side9. Occupant classification sensor

(pattern sensor)10. Occupant classification system control

unit11. Seat belt with pretensioner12. Side satellite sensor

SedanLRS2058


NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System for the driver and frontpassenger seats. This system is designed tomeet certification requirements under U.S. regu-lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag islocated in the center of the steering wheel. Thepassenger supplemental front-impact air bag ismounted in the dashboard above the glove box.The front air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although they may in-flate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper front air bag system opera-tion.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dualstage air bag inflators. It also monitors informa-tion from the crash zone sensor, the Air bagControl Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors andthe occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-sor). Inflator operation is based on the severity ofa collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For

the front passenger, the occupant classificationsensor is also monitored. Based on informationfrom the sensors, only one front air bag mayinflate in a crash, depending on the crash severityand whether the front occupants are belted orunbelted. Additionally, the front passenger airbag may be automatically turned OFF undersome conditions, depending on the informationprovided by the occupant classification sensor. Ifthe front passenger air bag is OFF, the passengerair bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat isunoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, butthe air bag will be off). See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in this section forfurther details. One front air bag inflating does notindicate improper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, please contact NISSAN or your NISSANdealer. If you are considering modification of yourvehicle due to a disability, you may also contactNISSAN. Contact information is contained in thefront of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noisemay be heard, followed by the release of smoke.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the face andchest of the front occupants. They can help savelives and reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating front air bag may cause facial abrasionsor other injuries. Front air bags do not providerestraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat beltsshould be correctly worn and the driver and pas-senger seated upright as far as practical awayfrom the steering wheel or instrument panel. Thefront air bags inflate quickly in order to helpprotect the front occupants. Because of this, theforce of the front air bag inflating can increase therisk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or isagainst, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON position.



Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some con-ditions. Read this section carefully tolearn how it operates. Proper use of theseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-essary for most effective protection. Fail-ure to follow all instructions in thismanual concerning the use of seats, seatbelts and child restraints can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light islocated on the instrument panel above the radiocontrols. After the ignition switch is placed in the�ON� position, the front passenger air bag statuslight on the instrument panel illuminates for about7 seconds and then turns off or remains illumi-nated depending on the front passenger seatoccupied status. The light operates as follows:

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The isOFF and the front passenger air bag is OFFand will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,child or child restraint as outlined in thissection: The illuminates to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is OFF andwill not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meets the conditions outlined in thissection: The light is OFF to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is opera-tional.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described below inaccordance with U.S. regulations. If the front

passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in acrash. The driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bagto certain front passenger seat occupants, suchas children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF.

The occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-sor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and isdesigned to detect an occupant and objects onthe seat. For example, if a child is in the frontpassenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System isdesigned to turn the passenger air bag OFF inaccordance with the regulations. Also, if a childrestraint of the type specified in the regulations ison the seat, the occupant classification sensorcan detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the passen-ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Forsmall adults it may be turned OFF, however if theoccupant does not sit in the seat properly (forexample, by not sitting upright, by sitting on anedge of the seat, or by otherwise being out ofposition), this could cause the sensor to turn theair bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and

WRS0475


wearing the seat belt properly for the most effec-tive protection by the seat belt and supplementalair bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.NISSAN also recommends that appropriate childrestraints and booster seats be properly installedin a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupantclassification sensor is designed to operate asdescribed above to turn the front passenger airbag OFF for specified child restraints as requiredby the regulations. Failing to properly securechild restraints and to use the ALR mode (childrestraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip ormove in an accident or sudden stop. This canalso result in the passenger air bag inflating in acrash instead of being OFF. See “Child re-straints” earlier in this section for proper use andinstallation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, thepassenger air bag is designed not to inflate in acrash. However, heavy objects placed on theseat could result in air bag inflation, because ofthe object being detected by the occupant clas-sification sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you canmonitor when the front passenger air bag is au-tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.The light will not illuminate when the front pas-senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicatingthat the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seatproperly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,the passenger air bag status light may or may notbe illuminated, depending on the size of the childand the type of child restraint being used. If the airbag status light is not illuminated (indicating thatthe air bag might inflate in a crash), it could bethat the child restraint or seat belt is not beingused properly. Make sure that the child restraint isinstalled properly, the seat belt is used properlyand the occupant is positioned properly. If the airbag status light is not illuminated, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-minate even though you believe that the childrestraint, the seat belts and the occupant areproperly positioned, the system may be sensingan unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag isOFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that thesystem is OFF by using a special tool. However,

until you have confirmed with your dealer thatyour air bag is working properly, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag statuslight will take a few seconds to register a changein the passenger seat status. However, if the seatbecomes unoccupied, the air bag status light willremain off.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the supplemental air bag warninglight , located in the meter and gauges areain the center of the instrument panel, will blink.Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air bagprecautions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the front airbags inflate.


● Do not place objects with sharp edgeson the seat. Also, do not place heavyobjects on the seat that will leave per-manent impressions in the seat. Suchobjects can damage the seat or occu-pant classification sensor (pattern sen-sor). This can affect the operation of theair bag system and result in seriouspersonal injury.

● Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hotsteam cleaners) on the seat. This candamage the seat or occupant classifica-tion sensor. This can also affect theoperation of the air bag system andresult in serious personal injury.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Tampering with the front air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.Tampering includes changes to thesteering wheel and the instrumentpanel assembly by placing materialover the steering wheel pad and abovethe instrument panel or by installingadditional trim material around the airbag system.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that are not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion sensor.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thefront air bag system. Tampering withthe seat belt system may result in seri-ous personal injury.

● Work on and around the front air bagsystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. The Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) wiring should not bemodified or disconnected. Unauthor-ized electrical test equipment and prob-ing devices should not be used on theair bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of the supplementalair bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the front air bag systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.


Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of theseatback of the front seats. The curtain air bagsare located in the side roof rails. These systemsare designed to meet voluntary guidelines to helpreduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occu-pants. However, all of the information, cau-tions and warnings in this manual still ap-ply and must be followed. The side air bagsand curtain air bags are designed to inflate inhigher severity side collisions, although they may

inflate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity side impact.They are designed to inflate on the side where thevehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-tain side collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper side air bag and curtain airbag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bagsinflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followedby the release of smoke. This smoke is not harm-ful and does not indicate a fire. Care should betaken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation andchoking. Those with a history of a breathing con-dition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the chest andpelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain airbags help to cushion the impact force to the headof occupants in the front and rear outboard seat-ing positions. They can help save lives and re-duce serious injuries. However, an inflating sideair bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasionsor other injuries. Side air bags and curtain airbags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the side air bag. Rear seatpassengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side roofrails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflatequickly in order to help protect the occupants.Because of this, the force of the side air bag andcurtain air bag inflating can increase the risk ofinjury if the occupant is too close to, or is against,these air bag modules during inflation. The sideair bags and curtain air bag will deflate quicklyafter the collision is over.

The side air bags and curtain air bags op-erate only when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.


WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if a side air bag inflates.

WRS0816


● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain air bag system componentswill be hot. Do not touch them; you mayseverely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain air bagsystems. This is to prevent damage to oraccidental inflation of the side air bagand curtain air bag or damage to theside air bag and curtain air bag systems.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of theside air bag and curtain air bag systems.

● Tampering with the side air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.For example, do not change the frontseats by placing material near the seat-backs or by installing additional trimmaterial, such as seat covers, aroundthe side air bag.

● Work around and on the side air bagand curtain air bag system should bedone by a NISSAN dealer. Installationof electrical equipment should also bedone by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-ing harnesses* should not be modifiedor disconnected. Unauthorized electri-cal test equipment and probing devicesshould not be used on the side air bagor curtain air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the side air bag andcurtain air bag systems and guide the buyer tothe appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (Frontseats)

WARNING

● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-ter activation. They must be replacedtogether with the retractor and buckleas a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in acollision but a pretensioner is not acti-vated, be sure to have the pretensionersystem checked and, if necessary, re-placed by your NISSAN dealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pretensioner system. This is to pre-vent damage to or accidental activationof the pretensioners. Tampering withthe pretensioner system may result inserious personal injury.

● Work around and on the pretensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pretensioner system.

● If you need to dispose of a pretensioneror scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSANdealer. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.

Working with the seat belt retractor, the preten-sioner helps tighten the seat belt when the ve-hicle becomes involved in certain types of colli-sions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.


The pretensioner is encased with the seat beltretractor. These seat belts are used the same wayas conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-leased and a loud noise may be heard. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allowthe seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) toreduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light isused to indicate malfunctions in the pretensionersystem. (See �SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT� in this section for more de-tails.) If the operation of the supplemental air bagwarning light indicates there is a malfunction,have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pretensioner systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (locatedon the sun visors)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle asshown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHTThe supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten-sioners and all related wiring.

When the ignition is placed in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

WRS0895 LRS0100


If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag and curtain air bag andpretensioner systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side airbag and curtain air bag or pretensioner systemsmay not operate properly. They must be checkedand repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearestNISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-sioner systems will not operate in an ac-cident. To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have your vehicle checked by aNISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bagsand pretensioners are designed to inflate on aone-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it isdamaged, the supplemental air bag warning lightremains illuminated after inflation has occurred.Repair and replacement of these supplementalair bag systems should be done only by aNISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain airbags, pretensioners and related parts should bepointed out to the person performing the mainte-nance. The ignition should always be in the LOCKposition when working under the hood or insidethe vehicle.

WARNING

● Once a front air bag, side air bag, orcurtain air bag has inflated, the air bagmodule will not function again andmust be replaced. Additionally, the ac-tivated pretensioners must also be re-placed. The air bag module and preten-sioners should be replaced by aNISSAN dealer. The air bag module andpretensioners cannot be repaired.

● The front air bag, side air bag, curtainair bag systems and the pretensionersystem should be inspected by aNISSAN dealer if there is any damage tothe front end or side portion of thevehicle.

● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-tal air bag or pretensioners or scrap thevehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incor-rect disposal procedures could causepersonal injury.


MEMO


2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-10Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Vehicle information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17How to use the Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . 2-17

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Xenon headlights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-32Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Storage pouch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41Storage box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Covered storage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Personal Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51HomeLink� universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-51

Programming HomeLink�. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52Programming HomeLink� for Canadiancustomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Operating the HomeLink� universaltransceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Rolling code programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54Reprogramming a single HomeLink� button . . . . . . 2-54If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

1. Vents (P. 4-18)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-29)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped)/Bluetooth� Hands-freePhone System (if so equipped)(P. 4-104, P. 4-100, P. 4-114)

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn(P. 1-40, P. 2-35)

6. Cruise control main/set switch(P. 5-20)

7. Windshield wiper and washer switch(P. 2-27)

8. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)9. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-34)10. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-50)11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-40)12. Glove box (P. 2-41)13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)14. Covered storage box (P. 2-42)15. Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(P. 4-26)16. Heater and air conditioner (manual)

(P. 4-19)17. Shift selector (P. 5-12)18. Audio system controls (if so equipped)/

Storage (if so equipped)(P. 4-29, P.2-42)

19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls(P. 3-29)

WIC1598

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

20. Vehicle information display controls(P. 2-17)

21. Hood release (P. 3-24)22. Trunk opener (P. 3-24)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P. 2-36)NISSAN Intelligent Key™ port (P. 5-7)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

1. Tachometer2. Speedometer3. Fuel gauge4. Engine coolant temperature gauge5. Odometer/twin trip odometer6. Twin trip odometer change button

7. Vehicle information display8. Instrument brightness control

WIC1259

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Speedometer2. Change button3. Odometer/twin trip odometerSPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

SpeedometerThe speedometer �1 indicates vehicle speed inmiles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour(km/h).

Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer/twin trip odometer is displayedwhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the change button changes the displayas follows:

Trip → Trip → Trip

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-ond resets the currently displayed trip odometerto zero.

WIC1418 WIC1261


TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine intothe red zone �1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-gine speed. Operating the engine in thered zone may cause serious enginedamage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range �1 when the gauge needle pointswithin the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “Incase of emergency”section for immediateaction required.

LIC1058 LIC1386


FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after theignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon aspossible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see “Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL)” later inthis section.

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-dicates the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi-tion, press the button as described in thechart below to activate various features of theautomatic anti-glare rearview mirror.

Push and hold

thebutton for about:

Feature:(Push button again for about 1 sec-ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

5 secondsCompass zone can be changed tocorrect false compass readings

9 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glarefeature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearviewmirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-ments” section.

LIC1060

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)


Press the button for about 1 second whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON position totoggle the compass display �1 on or off. Thedisplay will indicate the direction of the vehicle’sheading.

N: NorthE: EastS: SouthW: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass bydriving the vehicle in three complete circles atless than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by drivingyour vehicle on your everyday route. The com-pass will be calibrated once it has tracked threecomplete circles.

COMPASS DISPLAY

Press the button when the ignition switchis placed in the ON position. The direction will bedisplayed.

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo-graphical north is known as variance. In someareas, this difference can sometimes be greatenough to cause false compass readings. Followthese instructions to set the variance for yourparticular location if this happens:

1. Establish your location on the zone map.Refer to the illustration. Record your zonenumber.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Press the button in for 5 seconds untilthe current zone entry number is displayed.

4. Press the button repeatedly until thedesired zone entry number is displayed.

Once the desired zone number is displayed, stoppressing the button and the display willshow compass direction within a few seconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

LIC1487


● If a magnet is located near the com-pass or the vehicle is driven where theterrestrial magnetism is disturbed, thecompass display may not indicate thecorrect direction.

● In places where the terrestrial magne-tism is disturbed, the correction of thedirection starts automatically.

Inaccurate compass direction:

The compass display is equipped with automaticcorrection function. If the correct direction is notshown, follow this procedure.

1. With the display turned on, press and holdthe switch for about 9 seconds. Thedisplay will read “C.”

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehiclein three complete circles at a maximumspeed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles the displayshould return to normal.

● If the compass deviates from the correctindication soon after repeated adjustment,have the compass checked at an authorizedNISSAN dealer.

WIC0355


● The compass may not indicate the correctcompass point in tunnels or while driving upor down a steep hill. (The compass returnsto the correct compass point when the ve-hicle moves to an area where the geomag-netism is stabilized.)

CAUTION

● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,which are attached to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet. They affect the op-eration of the compass.

● When cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror as it maycause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.


or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light

Charge warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)position indicator light (if so equipped)

Slip indicator light

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)check warning light (if so equipped)

Cruise main switch indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise set switch indicator light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicatorlight

Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Master warning light High beam indicator light (blue)

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand place the ignition switch in the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

, or , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then gooff:

or , , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatea burned-out bulb or an open circuit in theelectrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS


WARNING LIGHTSor Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light illuminates and then turns off. Thisindicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while theengine is running, or while driving, it may indicatethe ABS is not functioning properly. Have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-tion is turned off. The brake system then operatesnormally, but without anti-lock assistance. See�Brake system� in the �Starting and driving� sec-tion.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on when the parkingbrake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.If the light comes on while the engine is runningwith the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by a NISSANdealer.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warningindicator

When the parking brake is released and thebrake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brakewarning light and the Anti-lock Braking System(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate theABS is not functioning properly. Have the brakesystem checked, and if necessary, repaired by aNISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv-ing and abrupt braking. (See “Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS) warning light” in this section.)

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANdealer immediately.


CAUTION

● Do not ground electrical accessoriesdirectly to the battery terminal. Doingso will bypass the variable control sys-tem and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely. Refer to “Variablevoltage control system” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section laterin this manual.

● Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) checkwarning light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on for about 2 seconds.If the light comes on at any other time, it mayindicate the CVT system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If thelight flickers or comes on during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engineimmediately and call a NISSAN dealer or otherauthorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Use thedipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tirepressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of lowtire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is notfunctioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light illuminates for about 1 secondand turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the warning light will illuminate.A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning alsoappears in the vehicle information display.

When the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates, you should stop and adjust thetire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label locatedin the driver’s door opening. The low tirepressure warning light does not automati-cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-ommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the lowtire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-sure gauge to check the tire pressure.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning is activeas long as the low tire pressure warning lightremains illuminated.

For additional information, see “Vehicle informa-tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section andin the “In case of emergency” section.


TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the lowtire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position. The light will remain onafter the 1 minute. Have the system checked by aNISSAN dealer. The CHECK TIRE PRESSUREwarning does not appear if the low tire pressurewarning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal-function.

For additional information, see “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

WARNING

● If the light does not illuminate with theignition switch placed in the ON posi-tion, have the vehicle checked by aNISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

● If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-rious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could re-sult in serious personal injury. Checkthe tire pressure for all four tires. Adjustthe tire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information label locatedin the driver’s door opening to turn thelow tire pressure warning light OFF. Ifthe light still illuminates while drivingafter adjusting the tire pressure, a tiremay be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-place it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced tire pressure will not be in-dicated, the TPMS will not function andthe low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute. Con-tact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

● The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), theTPMS may not operate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Master warning light

When the ignition is in the ON position, themaster warning light illuminates if any of the fol-lowing are displayed on the vehicle informationdisplay.


● No key warning

● Low fuel warning

● Low windshield-washer fluid warning

● Parking brake release warning

● Door/trunk open warning

● Loose fuel cap

● Check tire pressure warning

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition switch is placed in the ON or STARTposition and remains illuminated until the driver’sseat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chimesounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’sseat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate ifthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position, the system does not activate thewarning light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionfor precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON orSTART position, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and thenturns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-sioner systems need servicing and your vehiclemust be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-tensioners may not function properly. For addi-tional details, see “Supplemental restraint sys-tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bag, curtain air bag systemsand/or pretensioner systems will not op-erate in an accident. To help avoid injuryto yourself or others, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

INDICATOR LIGHTSFor additional information on warnings and indi-cators, see “Vehicle information display” later inthis section.

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) positionindicator light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this indicator light shows the shift selec-tor position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual.


Cruise main switch indicatorlight

The light comes on when the cruise control mainswitch is pushed. The light goes out when themain switch is pushed again. When the cruisemain switch indicator light comes on, the cruisecontrol system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicatorlight

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If the lightblinks while the engine is running, it may indicatethe cruise control system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

Front passenger air bag statuslight

The front passenger air bag status light ( )will be lit and the passenger front air bag will beOFF depending on how the front passenger seatis being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,see “Front passenger air bag and status light” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may also comeon steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to makesure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closedtightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds whenthe engine is not running, it indicates that thevehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-

tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

Operation

The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel-filler cap ifthe LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears inthe vehicle information display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or installthe cap and continue to drive the vehicle.The light should turn off after a fewdriving trips. If the light does not turnoff after a few driving trips, have the vehicleinspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed to thedealer.

● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — Anengine misfire has been detected which maydamage the emission control system. To re-duce or avoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.


– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinkingand come on steady. Have the vehicle inspectedby a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.

Security indicator light

This light blinks when the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.

The blinking security indicator light indicates thatthe security systems equipped on the vehicle areoperational.

For additional information, see “Security sys-tems” later in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC system orthe traction control system is operating, thusalerting that the vehicle is nearing its tractionlimits. The road surface may be slippery.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VehicleDynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control hasbeen turned off.

Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switchagain or restart the engine and the system will bereactivated. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes onwhen you push the push-button ignition switch tothe ON position. The light will turn off after about 2seconds if the system is operational. If the light stayson or comes on along with the indicator lightwhile you are driving, have the Vehicle DynamicControl system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system isoperating, you might feel slight vibration or hearthe system working when starting the vehicle oraccelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warningThe disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a disc brake pad requires replacement, itmakes a high pitched scraping sound when thevehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chimeA chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the ignition switch is placed in the ACC orOFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCKposition with the Intelligent Key left in the Intelli-gent Key port. Make sure the ignition switch isplaced in the LOCK position, and take the Intel-ligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.


Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door isopened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ door buzzerThe Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if theIntelligent Key is left inside the vehicle whenlocking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, besure to check both the vehicle and the IntelligentKey. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

The vehicle information display �1 is located onthe bottom of the speedometer. It displays suchitems as:

● Intelligent Key operation information

● some indicators and warnings

● other information

For details about the Intelligent Key, see“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section.

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLEINFORMATION DISPLAY

Press the button, located on the instru-ment panel just behind the steering wheel, todisplay the following modes:

MPG→ MPG/MPH → Time/Miles → Range →Exterior Temperature → Setting → Warning

WIC1102 LIC1103

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY


Fuel economy mode

The fuel economy mode can be selected to dis-play the instant fuel economy since the last reset.

Average speed mode

The average speed mode can be selected todisplay the average miles per gallon and miles perhour since the last reset.

Time/Miles (km) mode

The time/miles (km) mode can be selected toshow the time and distance driven since the lastreset.

LIC1093 LIC1097 WIC1266


Range mode

The range mode can be selected to give you anestimation of the distance that can be drivenbefore refueling. The range is constantly calcu-lated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tankand the actual fuel consumption.

Exterior temperature mode

The exterior temperature mode can be selectedto provide you with the temperature outside ofyour vehicle.

Setting mode

The setting mode allows you to set reminders orpreferences for alerts, maintenance intervals orlanguage displays.

In the setting mode screen press to moveto:

● Alert

● Maintenance

● Options

and press to select the menu.

LIC1095 LIC1096 LIC1541


Alert mode

The alert mode allows you to set alerts notifyingyou of time to rest or icy conditions.

The time to rest alert lets you know when youhave been traveling for a long time and may needa break.

The icy alert notifies you that icy driving condi-tions may exist.

Reset mode

The reset mode can be selected in any screenthat allows for preferences to be programmed.Once the screen is selected, you have the optionto reset the selected distances or time to a newsetting.

Maintenance mode

The maintenance mode allows you to set alertsfor the reminding of maintenance intervals for thefollowing:

● tires

● oil

● filter

● other

Set a desired interval by pushing to high-light the maintenance field and pressing .The reset mode will open up and allow you toenter the desired distance.

LIC1544 LIC1046 LIC1545


For additional information, see “Indicators formaintenance” later in this section.

Options mode

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear whenselecting the “Language/Unit” key andpressing .

Language: English or French

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPGMetric — km, °C, l/km

You can select the language and unit using

the button and pressing .

The settings are automatically saved when youexit the menu by pressing the BACK button orany other mode button.

Warning mode

The warning mode can be selected to view anywarnings that may be present. Once the screen isselected you have the option of skipping thewarning or viewing it in detail.

Warnings can be present for issues such as anopen door or low fuel. For more information aboutpotential warnings see “Vehicle information dis-play warnings and indicators” later in this section.

LIC1546 LIC1098


Indicators for maintenance

1. Engine oil replacement indicatorThis indicator appears when the customerset distance comes for changing the engineoil. You can set or reset the distance forchanging the engine oil. See “Maintenancemode” earlier in this section.

2. Oil filter replacement indicatorThis indicator appears when the customerset distance comes for replacing the oil filter.You can set or reset the distance for replac-ing the oil filter. See “Maintenance mode”earlier in this section.

3. Tire replacement indicatorThis indicator appears when the customerset distance comes for replacing tires. Youcan set or reset the distance for replacingtires. See “Maintenance mode” earlier in thissection.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not asubstitute for regular tire checks, includ-ing tire pressure checks. See “ChangingWheels and Tires” in “Maintenance & Do-It-Yourself” section. Many factors includ-ing tire inflation, alignment, driving habitsand road conditions affect tire wear andwhen tires should be replaced. Setting thetire replacement indicator for a certaindriving distance does not mean your tireswill last that long. Use the tire replace-ment indicator as a guide only and alwaysperform regular tire checks. Failure to per-form regular tire checks, including tirepressure checks could result in tire fail-ure. Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to a collision, which couldresult in serious personal injury or death.

4. “OTHER” indicatorThis indicator appears when the customer setdistance comes for checking or replacingmaintenance items other than the engine oil, oilfilter and tires. Other maintenance items caninclude such things as air filter or tire rotation.You can set or reset the distance for checkingor replacing the items. See “Maintenancemode” earlier in this section. For scheduledmaintenance items and intervals, see your“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.”LIC2027


Vehicle information display warningsand indicators

1. Door and trunk open warning2. Push warning (CVT models)3. Low fuel warning4. Low windshield-washer fluid warning

5. No key warning

6. Parking brake warning

7. Shift P warning (CVT models)

8. Engine start operation indicator (CVT models)

9. Engine start operation indicator (M/T models)

10. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indicator11. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indicator12. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery discharge

indicator13. Loose fuel cap warning14. Check tire pressure warning

LIC2007


Door and trunk open warning

This warning illuminates when a door or the trunkhas been opened when the engine is running.

Push warning (CVT models)

After the Shift P warning illuminates, the Pushwarning will illuminate if the ignition switch isplaced in the ACC position when the shift selec-tor is moved to the P (Park) position.

See “Shift P warning (CVT models)” in this sec-tion for additional information.

To turn off the Push warning, place the ignitionswitch in the ON position and then in the LOCKposition.

Low fuel warning

This warning illuminates when the fuel level in thefuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it isconvenient, preferably before the fuel gaugereaches E (Empty). There will be a small re-serve of fuel in the tank when the fuelgauge needle reaches E (Empty).

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

This warning illuminates when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. See “Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

No key warning

This warning illuminates following two condi-tions:

1. When the ignition switch is pushed and theIntelligent Key cannot be recognized by thesystem. If this warning illuminates, you can-not start the engine.

Check for the following causes and performthe assigned remedies:

– The battery of the Intelligent Key carriedwith you is discharged completely. Re-place the battery with a new one.

– The Intelligent Key carried with you is notregistered to the system. Use the regis-tered Intelligent Key.

– You do not have an Intelligent Key withyou. Carry an Intelligent Key with you.

2. When the door is closed with the IntelligentKey left outside the vehicle and the ignitionswitch is placed in the ACC or ON position.A chime will also sound.

Parking brake warning

This warning illuminates when the parking brakeis set and the vehicle is driven.

SHIFT P warning (CVT models)

This warning illuminates when the ignition switchis pushed to stop the engine with the shift selec-tor in any position except in the P (Park) position.

If this warning illuminates, the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position. Move the shift selec-tor to the P (Park) position or place the ignitionswitch in the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound.

If the shift selector is moved to the P (Park)position, the Push warning will appear. Refer to“Push warning (CVT models)” in this section.

For additional information about Intelligent Key,see “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

Engine start operation indicator (CVTmodels)

This indicator illuminates when the ignition switchis placed in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON positionwith the shift selector in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start bypushing the push-button ignition switch with thebrake pedal depressed.


Engine start operation indicator (M/Tmodels)

This indicator illuminates when the ignition switchis placed in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON positionwith the shift selector in neutral and the parkingbrake on.

This indicator means that the engine will start bypushing the ignition switch with the clutch andthe brake pedal depressed.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indica-tor

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Keyneeds to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port.(For example, the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged.)

If this indicator illuminates, insert the IntelligentKey into the Intelligent Key port in the correctdirection. See “Push-button ignition switch” inthe “Starting and driving” section.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indica-tor

This indicator illuminates when the driver’s dooris opened with the ignition switch placed in theOFF position and the Intelligent Key placed in theIntelligent Key port. A key reminder chime alsosounds.

If this indicator illuminates, remove the IntelligentKey from the Intelligent Key port and take it withyou when leaving the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery dis-charge indicator

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Keybattery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the batterywith a new one. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Loose fuel cap warning

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap isnot tightened correctly after the vehicle has beenrefueled. See “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section.

Check tire pressure warning

This warning appears when the low tire pressurewarning light in the meter illuminates and low tirepressure is detected. If this warning appears,stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressure shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label. See “Lowtire pressure warning light” earlier in this sectionand “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”in the “Starting and driving” section.

Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-tems:

● Vehicle security system

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMThe vehicle security system provides visual andaudible alarm signals if someone opens the doorsor trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not,however, a motion detection type system thatactivates when a vehicle is moved or when avibration occurs.

LIC0301

SECURITY SYSTEMS


The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannotprevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior orexterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-ways secure your vehicle even if parking for abrief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key inthe vehicle, and always lock the vehicle whenunattended. Be aware of your surroundings, andpark in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, suchas component locks, identification markers, andtracking systems, are available at auto supplystores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealermay also offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.

3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock alldoors. The doors can be locked with theIntelligent Key, door handle request switch(if so equipped), power door lock switch ormechanical key.

4. Confirm that the security indicator lightcomes on. The security light stays on forabout 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys-tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-onds the vehicle security system automati-cally shifts into the armed phase. Thesecurity light begins to flash once every 3seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-armtime period, the driver’s door is unlocked bythe key or the keyfob, or the ignition switch isplaced in the ACC or ON position, the sys-tem will not arm.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willactivate with all the doors, hood andtrunk lid locked with the ignitionswitch placed in the LOCK position.When placing the ignition switch in theACC or ON position, the system will bereleased.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after a pe-riod of time. However, the alarm reactivates ifthe vehicle is tampered with again. The alarmcan be shut off by unlocking the driver’s dooror trunk lid with the key, or by pressingthe button on the Intelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening the door or trunk lid without usingthe key or Intelligent Key (even if the door isunlocked by releasing the door inside lockswitch).

How to stop an activated alarmThe alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’sdoor or the trunk lid with the key, pressingthe button on the Intelligent Key, or press-ing the request switch (if so equipped) on thedriver’s or passenger’s door with the IntelligentKey in range of the door handle.


NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of aregistered key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCCRules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever theignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACCposition. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, the light will remain on while theignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer forNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allregistered keys that you have when visitingyour NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer switch oper-ates when the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

�1 Intermittent — intermittent operation can beadjusted by turning the switch toward �A(Slower) or �B (Faster). Also, for vehiclesequipped with speed dependent wipers, theintermittent operation speed varies in accor-dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-tent operation speed will be faster.)

LIC0474 LIC1061

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH


�2 Low — continuous low speed operation

�3 High — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up �4 to have one sweep opera-tion of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you �5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir isempty.

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluidreservoir with washer fluid concen-trates at full strength. Some methyl al-cohol based washer fluid concentratesmay permanently stain the grille ifspilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-centrates with water to the manufactur-er’s recommended levels before pour-ing the fluid into the windshield-washerfluid reservoir. Do not use thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir tomix the washer fluid concentrate andwater.

To defrost the rear window glass and outsidemirrors (if so equipped), start the engine andpush the rear window defroster switch on. Therear window defroster indicator light on theswitch comes on. Push the switch again to turnthe defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

Type ALIC2030

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)DEFROSTER SWITCH


NOTE:

The top and bottom few rows of wires onthe rear window are not part of the rearwindow defroster system. These wiresmake up the antenna for the audio system.

XENON HEADLIGHTS (if soequipped)

WARNING

cHIGH VOLTAGE

● When xenon headlights are on, theyproduce a high voltage. To prevent anelectric shock, never attempt to modifyor disassemble. Always have your xe-non headlights replaced at a NISSANdealer.

● Xenon headlights provide considerablymore light than conventional head-lights. If they are not correctly aimed,they might temporarily blind an oncom-ing driver or the driver ahead of you andcause a serious accident. If headlightsare not aimed correctly, immediatelytake your vehicle to a NISSAN dealerand have the headlights adjustedcorrectly.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, itsbrightness or color varies slightly. However, thecolor and brightness will soon stabilize.

● The life of xenon headlights will beshortened by frequent on-off opera-tion. It is generally desirable not to turnoff the headlights for short intervals(for example, when the vehicle stops ata traffic signal). Even when the daytimerunning lights are active (Canada only),the xenon headlights do not turn on.This way the life of the xenon head-lights is not reduced.

● If the xenon headlight bulb is close toburning out, the brightness will drasti-cally decrease, the light will start blink-ing, or the color of the light will be-come reddish. If one or more of theabove signs appear, contact a NISSANdealer.

Type BWIC1460

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH


HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

�1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

�2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

Type ALIC1085

Type BLIC1064

Type CLIC1063


CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Autolight system (if so equipped)The autolight system allows the headlights to beset so they turn on and off automatically. Theautolight system can:

● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,license plate and instrument panel lights au-tomatically when it is dark.

● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

● Keep all the lights on for a period of time afteryou place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and all doors are closed.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-tion �1 .

2. Push the push-button ignition switch to theON position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns theheadlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition and a door is opened and left open, theheadlights remain ON for a period of time. Ifanother door is opened while the headlights areon, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to

the OFF, , or position.

LIC1086


Be sure you do not put anything on top ofthe autolight sensor located on the top sideof the instrument panel. The autolight sen-sor controls the autolight; if it is covered,the autolight sensor reacts as if it is darkout and the headlights will illuminate. Ifthis occurs while parked with the engineoff and the ignition switch placed in the ONposition, your vehicle’s battery could be-come discharged.

Headlight beam select

�1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

�2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

�3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver systemIf the ignition switch is placed in the OFF positionwhile the headlight switch is in theor position, the headlights will turn off aftera period of time.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-tomatically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytime runninglights operate with the headlight switch in theOFF position or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe parking brake is released. The daytime run-ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis placed in the OFF position.

LIC1068 LIC1087


WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument cluster illuminates when the igni-tion switch is placed in the ON position.

The instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight control switch is in the

AUTO, or position.

Turn the control left or right to adjust the bright-ness of the instrument panel lights when drivingat night.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

�1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

�2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

LIC1066 LIC1088


FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switchto the position, then turn the fog lightswitch to the position.To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switchin the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch tothe position.To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switchto the OFF position.The headlights must be on and the low beamsselected for the fog lights to operate. The foglights automatically turn off when the high beamheadlights are selected.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switchplaced in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

LIC1089 LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH


To sound the horn, push near the horn icon of thesteering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the low or high position of the switch,as desired, depending on the temperature.The indicator light in the switch will illumi-nate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switchoff.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use theseat heater if you or the occupants cannotmonitor elevated seat temperatures orhave an inability to feel pain in body partsthat contact the seat. Use of the seatheater by such people could result in se-rious injury.

CAUTION

● Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

● Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seatmay become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

● When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

LIC2133 LIC1543

HORN HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)


● If any malfunctions are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby your NISSAN dealer.

● The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-ing conditions.If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. Ifmaximum engine power is needed to free a stuckvehicle, turn the VDC system off.To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFFswitch. The indicator will come on.Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart theengine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

The power outlets are for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones. Theyare rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

Type A: the power outlet in the front console boxis powered directly by the battery.

Type B: the power outlet in the front console boxis powered only when the ignition switch is in theACC or ON position.

The power outlet in the instrument panel is pow-ered only when the ignition switch is in the ACCor ON position.

LIC1548Instrument panel

LIC1070

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH

POWER OUTLET


Open the lower half of the console box to accessthe power outlet. Refer to “Console box” in thissection.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● Only certain power outlets are designedfor use with a cigarette lighter unit. Donot use any other power outlet for anaccessory lighter. See your NISSANdealer for additional information.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

● Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water or any otherliquid to contact the outlet.

MAP POCKETSConsole boxWIC1262 LIC1073

STORAGE


SEATBACK POCKETS (if soequipped)The seatback pockets are located on the back ofthe driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pocketscan be used to store maps.

STORAGE POUCH (if so equipped)A storage pouch is located on the front of thedriver’s and passenger’s seats.

WARNING

Do not store angular, sharp, heavy objectsor objects that cannot fully fit inside thepouch because they might increase thelikelihood of an injury in a crash.

SUNGLASSES HOLDERTo open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed whiledriving to prevent an accident.

LIC0016 LIC1242 WIC1551


CAUTION

● Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

CUP HOLDERSTo open the front cup holders, push the cupholder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid andpush down until it clicks in place.

The plastic insert (if so equipped) may be re-moved to accommodate a larger cup size or forcleaning.

Front - Type ALIC1075

Front - Type BLIC1105


The rear center cup holders are located in therear fold-down armrest (sedan) or in the rear armrest (coupe).

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

● Do not use bottle holder for any otherobjects that could be thrown about inthe vehicle and possibly injure peopleduring sudden braking or an accident.

● Do not use bottle holder for open liquidcontainers.

Rear (sedan)WRS0167

Rear (coupe)LIC1219

Soft bottle holderWIC1216


GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle. Use themaster key when locking �1 or unlocking �2 theglove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

Upper halfPull up on the driver’s side latch to open theupper half of the console box. The mat may beremoved for cleaning.

The upper half of the console box may be used forstorage of cellular phones. An access hole isprovided at the front of the upper half of theconsole box for phone cord routing to the poweroutlet.

Lower halfPull up on the passenger’s side latch to open thelower half of the console box. A power outlet islocated inside the console box. The mat may beremoved for cleaning.

WIC1076 WIC1120 WIC1121


STORAGE BOX (if so equipped) COVERED STORAGE BOXPush the center of the lid to open.

GROCERY HOOKSThe grocery hooks are located in the trunk andcan be used to hang a standard size plasticgrocery bag.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 20lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.

LIC1477 LIC1597 LIC0748


CARGO NET (if so equipped)

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision, un-secured cargo could cause personalinjury.

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargoarea from moving around while the vehicle is inmotion.

To install the cargo net, attach the net to theretainers.

To remove the cargo net, detach the net from thecargo net retainers.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position, or for aperiod of time after the ignition switch is placed inthe OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’sdoor is opened during this period of time, thepower to the windows is canceled.

WIC1264 LIC0802

WINDOWS


1. Window lock button2. Power door lock switch3. Front passenger side (automatic switch,

if so equipped)4. Right rear passenger side (sedan only)5. Left rear passenger side (sedan only)6. Driver side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switchThe driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close all of the windows.

To open a window, push the switch to the firstdetent and continue to hold down until the de-sired window position is reached. To close awindow, pull the switch to the first detent andcontinue to hold up until the desired windowposition is reached.

Front passenger’s power windowswitchThe passenger’s window switch operates onlythe corresponding passenger’s window. To openthe window, push the switch to the first detentand continue to hold it down until the desiredwindow position is reached �1 . To close thewindow, pull the switch to the first detent andcontinue to hold it up until the desired windowposition is reached �2 .

WIC1124 WIC1265


Rear power window switch (sedanonly)The rear power window switches open or closeonly the corresponding windows. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down �1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up �2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver’s side window can be opened orclosed. Push it again to cancel the window lockfunction.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, press the window switch down (onlydriver’s side shown) to the second detent andrelease it; it need not be held. The window auto-matically opens all the way. To stop the window,lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automaticoperation, pull the switch up to the second detentand release it; it need not be held. To stop thewindow, press the switch down while the windowis closing.

Auto-reverse functionIf the control unit detects something caught in thewindow as it is closing, the window will be imme-diately lowered.

The auto-reverse function can be activated whenthe window is closed by automatic operationwhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition or for a period of time after the ignitionswitch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the window.

LIC0718 LIC0410


When power window switch does notoperateIf the power window automatic function (closingonly) does not operate properly, perform the fol-lowing procedure to initialize the power windowsystem:


2. Open the window more than halfway byoperating the power window switch.

3. Pull the power window switch and hold it toclose the window, and then hold the switchmore than 3 seconds after the window isclosed.

4. Release the power window switch. Operatethe window by the automatic function toconfirm the initialization is complete. Thepower window automatically opens orcloses depending on if the automatic downor up function is selected.

5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for otherwindows.

If the power window function does not operateproperly after performing the above procedure,see a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

AUTOMATIC MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position. The auto-matic moonroof is operational for a period of time,even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC orOFF position. If the driver’s door or the frontpassenger’s door is opened during this period oftime, the power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroofTo fully open the moonroof, push the switchtoward �1 .

To fully close the moonroof, push the switchtoward �2 .

To open or close the moonroof part way, push theswitch in any direction while the moonroof issliding to stop it in the desired position.

Tilting the moonroofClose the moonroof by pushing the switchtoward �2 . Release the switch, then pushthe switch toward �2 again to tilt themoonroof up.

To tilt the moonroof down, push the switchtoward �1 .

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open moonroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe moonroof opening while the vehicleis in motion or while the moonroof isclosing.

WIC1559

MOONROOF (if so equipped)


CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the moonroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on themoonroof or surrounding area.

Resetting the moonroof switch

The moonroof switch may not operate properlyand need to be reset if any of the followingconditions have occurred:

● the moonroof has been manually moved,

● the moonroof motor has been removed andreinstalled after the moonroof has been re-positioned or adjusted,

● the moonroof glass panel has been adjustedor changed, or

● the electrical supply interrupted and/orsome malfunction has been detected.

Use the following reset procedure to return themoonroof operation to normal.


2. Push and hold the moonroof switchtoward �2 . Once the moonroof hasreached the full tilt position, release theswitch. Push and hold the switch toward

the �2 position again. After a delay offour seconds, the moonroof will make a smallmovement and backup.

3. Release the switch.

4. Within 5 seconds of releasing the switch,push and continuously hold the switchtoward �2 . The moonroof will movefrom the tilt position to the open position andback to the close position.

NOTE:

If the switch is released at any time duringStep 4, the procedure must be restarted.

5. Release the switch. Do not place the ignitionswitch in the OFF position for at least 2seconds. The moonroof is now reset.

If the moonroof still does not operate properly,have the moonroof system checked by a NISSANdealer.

Auto-reverse function (when closing ortilting down the moonroof)The auto-reverse function can be activated whenthe moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-matic operation when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position or for a period of timeafter the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the moonroofoccurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroofwill immediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-mediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keeppushing the tilt down switch within 5 secondsafter it happens; the moonroof will fully closegradually. Make sure nothing is caught in themoonroof.


WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open moonroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe moonroof opening while the vehicleis in motion or while the moonroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the moonroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on themoonroof or surrounding area.

SunshadeOpen and close the sunshade by sliding it for-ward or backward.

If the moonroof does not closeHave your NISSAN dealer check and repair themoonroof.

Type AWIC1550

Type BWIC1267


The interior light has a three-position switch andoperates regardless of ignition switch position.

● When the switch is in the ON position �1 ,the interior light illuminates, regardless ofdoor position. The light will go off after aperiod of time unless the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.

● When the switch is in the center DOORposition �2 , the front and rear personallights will illuminate when the driver’s door isopened. Lights remain on for a period of timeafter driver’s door is closed.

The lights will go off when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position, or the driver’s door isclosed and locked.

The lights will also go off after a period of timewhen the doors are open.

● When the switch is in the OFF position �3 ,the interior light does not illuminate, regard-less of door position.

NOTE:

The doorstep lights illuminate when thedriver and passenger doors are opened re-gardless of the interior light switch posi-tion. These lights will turn off automaticallyafter a period of time while doors are opento prevent the battery from becoming dis-charged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)The console light will turn on whenever the park-ing lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be adjustedwith the instrument brightness control.

WIC1476

INTERIOR LIGHT


To turn the rear personal lights on, press theswitch. To turn them off, press the switch again.

To turn the map lights on, press the light lens. Toturn them off, press the lens again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

Rear personal lights (sedan only)LIC1083

Front map lightsWIC1494

PERSONAL LIGHTS MAP LIGHTS


The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.

The light will go off after a period of time if thetrunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.

For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section of this manual.

The HomeLink� Universal Transceiver provides aconvenient way to consolidate the functions of upto three individual hand-held transmitters intoone built-in device.

HomeLink� Universal Transceiver:

● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)devices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks and se-curity systems.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the vehi-cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLink� will retain all program-ming.

Once the HomeLink� Universal Transceiveris programmed, retain the original trans-mitter for future programming procedures(Example: new vehicle purchases). Uponsale of the vehicle, the programmedHomeLink� Universal Transceiver buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. Foradditional information, refer to “Program-ming HomeLink�” later in this section.

WARNING

● Do not use the HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standards be-came effective for opener modelsmanufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-rage door opener which cannot detectan object in the path of a closing garagedoor and then automatically stop andreverse, does not meet current federalsafety standards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

● During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that people orobjects are clear of the garage door,gate, etc. that you are programming.

● Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming the HomeLink�Universal Transceiver.

TRUNK LIGHT HOMELINK� UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)


PROGRAMMING HOMELINK�

1. To begin, press and hold the two outerHomeLink� buttons (to clear the memory)until the indicator light �1 blinks (after 20seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLink� surface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press andhold both the HomeLink� button you want toprogram and the hand-held transmitter but-ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 hasbeen completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicatorlight on the HomeLink� flashes, changingfrom a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashingblink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.When the indicator light flashes rapidly, bothbuttons may be released. The rapidly flash-ing light indicates successful programming.To activate the garage door or other pro-

grammed device, press and hold the pro-grammed HomeLink� button — releasingwhen the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink� blinksrapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,HomeLink� has picked up a “rolling code”garage door opener signal. You will need toproceed with the next steps to train theHomeLink� to complete the programmingwhich may require a ladder and another per-son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-gram button located on the garage dooropener’s motor to activate the “trainingmode”. This button is usually located nearthe antenna wire that hangs down from themotor. If the wire originates from under alight lens, you will need to remove the lens toaccess the program button.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released theprogram button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, youhave 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.Use the help of a second person for conve-nience to assist when performing this step.

WIC0986 WIC0987


7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-ing the garage door opener’s program but-ton, quickly and firmly press and release theHomeLink� button you’ve just programmed.Press and release the HomeLink� button upto 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink� button should now be pro-grammed. (To program the remainingHomeLink� buttons for additional door orgate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to“clear” all previously programmedHomeLink� buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficultyprogramming your HomeLink� buttons, refer tothe HomeLink� web site at: www.homelink.comor call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK� FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERSPrior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-onds. To program your hand-held transmitter toHomeLink�, continue to press and hold theHomeLink� button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-gramming HomeLink�”) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every

2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly(indicating successful programming).

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-sible damage to the garage door openercomponents.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK�UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink� Universal Transceiver (once pro-grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-propriate programmed HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver button. The red indicator light willilluminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink� does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

● replace the hand-held transmitter batterieswith new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with itsbattery area facing away from theHomeLink� surface.

● press and hold both the HomeLink� andhand-held transmitter buttons without inter-ruption.

● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLink� surface. Hold the transmitter inthat position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLink� is not programmed within thattime, try holding the transmitter in anotherposition – keeping the indicator light in viewat all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,please contact the NISSAN Consumer AffairsDepartment. The phone numbers are located inthe Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATIONIndividual buttons cannot be cleared. However,to clear all programming, press and hold the twooutside buttons and release when the indicatorlight begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).


ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING

Rolling code garage door openers (or other roll-ing code devices) which are “code protected”and manufactured after 1996, may be deter-mined by the following:

● Reference the garage door opener Owner’sManual for verification.

● The hand-held transmitter appears to pro-gram the HomeLink� Universal Transceiverbut does not activate the garage door.

● Press and hold the trained HomeLink� but-ton. If the garage door opener has the rollingcode feature, the HomeLink� indicator lightwill flash rapidly, then remain on after 2 sec-onds.

To program the HomeLink� Universal Transceiverto a garage door opener with the rolling codefeature, follow these instructions after completingthe “Programming HomeLink�” (the aid of a sec-ond person may make the following proceduresquicker and easier).

1. Locate the training button on the garagedoor opener motor unit. Exact location andcolor of the button may vary by garage dooropener brand. If there is difficulty locatingthe training button, reference the garagedoor opener Owner’s Manual.

2. Press the training button on the garage dooropener motor unit (which may activate atraining light).

NOTE:

Following step 2, there are 30 seconds inwhich to initiate step 3.

3. Firmly press and release the programmedHomeLink� button a second time to com-plete the training process. (Some garagedoor openers may require you to do thisprocedure a third time to complete the train-ing.)

The garage door opener should now recognizethe HomeLink� Universal Transceiver and acti-vate when the HomeLink� button is pressed. Theremaining two buttons may now be programmed(if not yet programmed, follow steps 2 through 4in the “Programming HomeLink�” proceduresearlier in this section).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHOMELINK� BUTTONTo reprogram a HomeLink� Universal Transceiverbutton, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink� but-ton. Do not release the button until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76mm) away from the HomeLink� surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitterbutton.

4. The HomeLink� indicator light will flash, firstslowly and then rapidly. When the indicatorlight begins to flash rapidly, release bothbuttons.

The HomeLink� Universal Transceiver button hasnow been reprogrammed. The new device canbe activated by pushing the HomeLink� buttonthat was just programmed. This procedure willnot affect any other programmed HomeLink�buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change thecodes of any non-rolling code device that hasbeen programmed into HomeLink�. Consult theOwner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-facturer or dealer of those devices for additionalinformation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLink� Univer-sal Transceiver with your new transmitterinformation.


FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation. Note: Changesor modifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.


MEMO


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Child safety rear door lock (Sedan only) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ With Door and TrunkRequest Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9NISSAN Intelligent Key™ operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9How to use the remote keyless entryfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ Without Door and TrunkRequest Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

How to use the remote keyless entryfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Tilt/telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Vanity mirrors (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

1. Two Intelligent Keys2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent

Keys)3. Key number plateNISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™Your vehicle can only be driven with the IntelligentKey which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelli-gent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im-mobilizer System components.


As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-tered and used with one vehicle. The new keysmust be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior touse with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System of your vehicle. Since theregistration process requires erasing all memoryin the Intelligent Key components when register-ing new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keysthat you have to the NISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicatefrom. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealercan duplicate it.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the IntelligentKey:

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

● Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

● Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with akey holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.

WPD0363

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lockknob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it intothe Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns tothe lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock thedoors, trunk lid, glove box and rear seatback lock.

See “Doors” and “Trunk lid” in this section, “Stor-age” in the “Instruments and controls” section,“Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section, and “Up-

per tether anchor/key cylinder covers” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installedin the Intelligent Key slot.

Valet hand-off

When you have to leave a key with a valet, givethem the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-chanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box and the trunk from beingopened during valet hand-off, follow the proce-dures below:

1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFFposition.

2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-gent Key.

3. Lock the glove box and the rear seats withthe mechanical key.

4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet andkeep the mechanical key with you.

See “Trunk lid” in this section, “Storage” in the“Instruments and controls” section and “Seats” inthe “Safety — seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYSYou can only drive your vehicle using the masterkeys which are registered to the NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System components in your vehicle.

The master key can be used for all the locks.


Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-cate your existing key. This is because the regis-tration process will erase the memory of all keycodes previously registered into the NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, whichcontains an electrical transponder, to come intocontact with salt water. This could affect systemfunction.

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

When the doors are locked using one of thefollowing methods, the doors can not be openedusing the inside or outside door handles. Thedoors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.


LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front �1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear �2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral �3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocksall doors �4 .

Opening and closing windows (if soequipped)The driver’s door key operation allows you toopen and close windows equipped with auto-matic operation at the same time.

● To open the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the rear of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is unlocked.

● To close the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the front of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

Driver’s sideWPD0444

DOORS


LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position �1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position �2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) tothe lock position �1 . When locking the door thisway, be certain not to leave the key inside thevehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’sside) to the unlock position �2 .

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side) is moved to the lockposition with the Intelligent Key in the port andany door open, all doors will lock and unlockautomatically. With the Intelligent Key left in thevehicle (not in the Intelligent Key port) and anydoor open, all doors will unlock automatically anda chime will sound after the door is closed.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

● All doors lock automatically when the vehiclespeed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

● All doors unlock automatically when the ig-nition is placed in the OFF position.

The automatic unlock function can be de-activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-vate the automatic door unlock system, performthe following procedure:

1. Close all doors.


3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,push and hold the power door lock switch tothe position (UNLOCK) for more than5 seconds.

Inside lockWPD0291

Door lock switchWPD0381


4. When activated, the hazard indicator willflash twice. When deactivated, the hazardindicator will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in theOFF and ON position again between eachsetting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is deac-tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignitionswitch is placed in the OFF position. To unlockthe door manually, use the inside lock knob or thepower door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-ger’s side).

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK(Sedan only)

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position �1 , thedoor can be opened from the outside or theinside.

When the lever is in the LOCK position �2 ,the door can be opened only from the out-side.

WARNING

● Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Those whouse a pacemaker should contact theelectric medical equipment manufac-turer for the possible influences beforeuse.

● The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves when the buttons are pressed.The FAA advises the radio waves mayaffect aircraft navigation and communi-cation systems. Do not operate the In-telligent Key while on an airplane. Makesure the buttons are not operated unin-tentionally when the unit is stored for aflight.

The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locksusing the remote controller function or pushingthe request switch on the vehicle without takingthe key out from a pocket or purse. The operatingenvironment and/or conditions may affect theIntelligent Key operation.

Be sure to read the following before using theIntelligent Key.

LIC0716

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ WITHDOOR AND TRUNK REQUESTSWITCHES


CAUTION

● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when operating the vehicle.

● Never leave the Intelligent Key in thevehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating withthe vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-mental conditions may interfere with the opera-tion of the Intelligent Key under the followingoperating conditions:

● When operating near a location wherestrong radio waves are transmitted, such asa TV tower, power station and broadcastingstation.

● When in possession of wireless equipment,such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,and CB radio.

● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with orcovered by metallic materials.

● When any type of radio wave remote controlis used nearby.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed near anelectric appliance such as a personal com-puter.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parkingmeter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditionsbefore using the Intelligent Key function or usethe mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies dependingon the operating conditions, the battery’s life isapproximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-charged, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-gent Key port to start the engine. Replace thedischarged battery with a new one as soon aspossible. For more details, see “Push-button ig-nition switch” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receivingradio waves, if the key is left near equipmentwhich transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registeredand used with one vehicle. For information aboutthe purchase and use of additional IntelligentKeys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION











If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent theunauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operatethe vehicle. For information regarding the erasingprocedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be usedwhen the Intelligent Key is within the specifiedoperating range from the request switch �1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged orstrong radio waves are present near the operat-ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-ing range becomes narrower, and the IntelligentKey may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)from each request switch �1 .

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,handle or rear bumper, the request switches maynot function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operatingrange, it is possible for anyone, even someonewho does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push therequest switch to lock/unlock the doors.

Coupe shown Sedan similarWPD0465


DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKSPRECAUTION

● Do not push the door handle request switchwith the Intelligent Key held in your hand asillustrated. The close distance to the doorhandle will cause the Intelligent Key systemto have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-gent Key is outside the vehicle.

● After locking with the door handle requestswitch, verify the doors are securely lockedby testing them.

● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being leftinside the vehicle, make sure you carry theIntelligent Key with you and then lock thedoors.

● Do not pull the door handle before pushingthe door handle request switch. The doorwill be unlocked but will not open. Releasethe door handle once and pull it again toopen the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™OPERATIONYou can lock or unlock the doors without takingthe key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, youcan lock or unlock all doors by pushing the doorhandle request switch within the range of opera-tion.

WPD0375Coupe shown, Sedan similar

WPD0432


Locking doors

1. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCKposition and make sure you carry the Intelli-gent Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch �1while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the trunk will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe outside buzzer sounds twice.

NOTE:

● Doors lock with the door handle requestswitch while the ignition switch is not in theLOCK position.

● Doors do not lock by pushing the doorhandle request switch while any door isopen. However, doors lock with the me-chanical key even if any door is open.

● Doors do not lock with the door handlerequest switch with the Intelligent Key insidethe vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.However, when an Intelligent Key is insidethe vehicle, doors can be locked with an-other Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

● After locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure that the doorshave been securely locked by operatingthe door handle or the trunk openerswitch.

● When locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure to have theIntelligent Key in your possession be-fore operating the request switch toprevent the Intelligent Key from beingleft in the vehicle.

● The request switch is operational onlywhen the Intelligent Key has been de-tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protectionis equipped with the Intelligent Key.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doorsare locked, and then the Intelligent Key is putinside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;the lock will automatically unlock and the doorbuzzer sounds.

Coupe shown, Sedan similarWPD0433 WPD0369


NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-ating the request switch to lock the door.Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket oryour other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not functionunder the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the instrument panel.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the rear parcel shelf.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the glove box or a storage bin.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the door pockets.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed on orunder the spare tire area.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch �1 .

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and theoutside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch �1again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking thedoors, that door may not be unlocked. Returningthe door handle to its original position will unlockthe door. If the door does not unlock after return-ing the door handle, push the door handle re-quest switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed within 1minute after pushing the request switch.

● Opening any door.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

Coupe shown, Sedan similarWPD0432 WPD0369


The interior light timer illuminates for a period oftime when a door is unlocked and the room lightswitch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waitingby performing one of the following operations.

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.

● Locking the doors with the remote controller.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFFposition.

Opening the trunk lid

1. Push the trunk opener request switch �A formore than 1 second while carrying the Intel-ligent Key with you.

2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound 4times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection isequipped with the Intelligent Key.

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid isclosed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk willopen.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTEKEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTIONThe remote keyless entry function can operate alldoor locks using the remote keyless function ofthe Intelligent Key. The remote keyless functioncan operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) awayfrom the vehicle. The operating distance de-pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-tion under the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is not within theoperational range.

● When the doors or the trunk are open or notclosed securely.

● When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure not to leave the key inthe vehicle.

LPD0478


Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the IntelligentKey.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure that the doors have beensecurely locked by operating the doorhandles.

Unlocking doors


2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within 5 sec-onds to unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed within 1minute after pressing the button:

● Opening any doors.


WPD0359 WPD0360


The interior light illuminates for a period of timewhen a door is unlocked and the room lightswitch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting byperforming one of the following operations:


● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.


Opening windows (if so equipped)The Intelligent Key allows you to open windowsequipped with automatic operation simultane-ously.

● To open the windows, press the but-ton on the Intelligent Key longer than 3seconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressingthe button on the Intelligent Key.

The door windows cannot be closed byusing the Intelligent Key.

Releasing the trunk lid

Press the button for longer than 0.5 sec-onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk releasebutton will not operate when the ignition switch isin the ON position or when the trunk cancelswitch is in the OFF position. See “Cancelswitch” in this section.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pressing and holding the button on theIntelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for aperiod of time.

WPD0364 WPD0361


The panic alarm stops when:

● It has run for a period of time, or

● Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

● Pushing the request switch on the driver orpassenger door with the Intelligent Key inrange of the door handle.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the Intelligent Key.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING SIGNALSTo help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-pectedly by erroneous operation of the IntelligentKey or to help prevent the vehicle from beingstolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside andoutside the vehicle and a warning is displayed inthe instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning isdisplayed, be sure to check the vehicle and theIntelligent Key.

See the “Troubleshooting guide” that follows and“Vehicle information display” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section of this manual.

WPD0362


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEVerify the location of all Intelligent Keys that areprogrammed for the vehicle. If another IntelligentKey is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehiclesystem may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch to stopthe engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-play and the inside warning chime soundscontinuously.

The shift selector is not in the P (Park)position.

Shift the shift selector to the P (Park)position.

When opening the driver’s door to get outof the vehicle

The inside warning chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is placed in the ACCposition.

Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Keyport.

Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-gent Key port.

When closing the door after getting out ofthe vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on thedisplay, the outside chime sounds 3 timesand the inside warning chime sounds forapproximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is placed in the ACC orON position.


The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-play and the outside chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is placed in the ACCposition and the shift selector is not in the P(Park) position.

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion and place the ignition switch in theOFF position.

The shift “P” warning light appears on thedisplay and the outside chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition and the shift selector is not in the P(Park) position.

Move the shift selector to the P (Park)position.

When closing the door with the inside lockknob placed in the LOCK position

The outside chime sounds for approximately3 seconds and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle ortrunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.



When pushing the door handle requestswitch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately2 seconds.



A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.The door handle request switch is pushedbefore the door is closed.

Push the door handle request switch afterthe door is closed.

When closing the trunk lidThe outside chime sounds for approximately10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.Carry the Intelligent Key with you.


WARNING

● Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Those whouse a pacemaker should contact theelectric medical equipment manufac-turer for the possible influences beforeuse.

● The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves when the buttons are pressed.The FAA advises the radio waves mayaffect aircraft navigation and communi-cation systems. Do not operate the In-telligent Key while on an airplane. Makesure the buttons are not operated unin-tentionally when the unit is stored for aflight.

The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locksusing the remote controller function. The operat-ing environment and/or conditions may affect theIntelligent Key operation.

Be sure to read the following before using theIntelligent Key.

CAUTION

● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when operating the vehicle.

● Never leave the Intelligent Key in thevehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating withthe vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-mental conditions may interfere with the opera-tion of the Intelligent Key under the followingoperating conditions:

● When operating near a location wherestrong radio waves are transmitted, such asa TV tower, power station and broadcastingstation.

● When in possession of wireless equipment,such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,and CB radio.

● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with orcovered by metallic materials.

● When any type of radio wave remote controlis used nearby.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed near anelectric appliance such as a personal com-puter.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parkingmeter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditionsbefore using the Intelligent Key function or usethe mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies dependingon the operating conditions, the battery’s life isapproximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-charged, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-gent Key port to start the engine. Replace thedischarged battery with a new one as soon aspossible. For more details, see “Push-button ig-nition switch” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receivingradio waves, if the key is left near equipmentwhich transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registeredand used with one vehicle. For information aboutthe purchase and use of additional IntelligentKeys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™WITHOUT DOOR AND TRUNKREQUEST SWITCHES


CAUTION










If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent theunauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operatethe vehicle. For information regarding the erasingprocedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

OPERATING RANGEThe Intelligent Key functions can only be usedwhen the Intelligent Key is within the specifiedoperating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged orstrong radio waves are present near the operat-ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-ing range becomes narrower, and the IntelligentKey may not function properly.

The operating range is within 33 ft (10 m) of thevehicle.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTEKEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTIONThe remote keyless entry function can operate alldoor locks using the remote keyless function ofthe Intelligent Key. The remote keyless functioncan operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) awayfrom the vehicle. The operating distance de-pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-tion under the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is not within theoperational range.

● When the doors or the trunk are open or notclosed securely.

● When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure not to leave the key inthe vehicle.


Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion.

2. Close all doors.


4. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure that the doors have beensecurely locked by operating the doorhandles.

Unlocking doors


2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within 5 sec-onds to unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed within 1minute after pressing the button:

● Opening any doors.


WPD0359 WPD0360


The interior light illuminates for a period of timewhen a door is unlocked and the room lightswitch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting byperforming one of the following operations:


● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.


Releasing the trunk lid

Press the button for longer than 0.5 sec-onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk releasebutton will not operate when the ignition switch isin the ON position or when the trunk cancelswitch is in the OFF position. See “Cancelswitch” in this section.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pressing and holding the button on theIntelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for aperiod of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

● It has run for a period of time, or

● Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

WPD0364 WPD0361


Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the Intelligent Key.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING SIGNALSTo help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-pectedly by erroneous operation of the IntelligentKey or to help prevent the vehicle from beingstolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside andoutside the vehicle and a warning is displayed inthe instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning isdisplayed, be sure to check the vehicle and theIntelligent Key.

See the “Troubleshooting guide” that follows and“Vehicle information display” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section of this manual.

WPD0362


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEVerify the location of all Intelligent Keys that areprogrammed for the vehicle. If another IntelligentKey is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehiclesystem may respond differently than expected.


When pushing the ignition switch to stopthe engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-play and the inside warning chime soundscontinuously.

The shift selector is not in the P position.Shift the shift selector to the P position.

When opening the driver’s door to get outof the vehicle

The inside warning chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Keyport.

Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-gent Key port.

When closing the door after getting out ofthe vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on thedisplay, the outside chime sounds 3 timesand the inside warning chime sounds forapproximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.


The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-play and the outside chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC positionand the shift selector is not in the P (Park)position.

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion and place the ignition switch in theOFF position.

When closing the door with the inside lockknob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately3 seconds and all the doors unlock.



When closing the trunk lidThe outside chime sounds for approximately10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.Carry the Intelligent Key with you.


�1 Pull the hood lock release handle locatedbelow the driver’s side instrument panel; thehood springs up slightly.

�2 Lift the lever at the front of the hood with yourfingertips and raise the hood.

�3 Remove the support rod from the clamp.

�4 Insert the support rod into the hole on thepassenger’s side of the hood. �5

When closing the hood, return the hood rod to itsoriginal position. Lower the hood approximately12 inches (30 cm) above the latch and release it.This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

OPENER OPERATION

WARNING

● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

WPD0441 LPD0394

HOOD TRUNK LID



To open the trunk lid, push the opener switchdown.

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk liddown securely.

NOTE:

You can open the trunk lid with the Intelli-gent Key. Refer to “NISSAN IntelligentKey™” in this section.

Cancel switchWhen the switch, located inside the glove box, isin the OFF position, the power to the trunk lid willbe cancelled. The trunk can only be opened withthe master key or keyfob.

The trunk lid cannot be opened when:

● using the trunk lid release switch,

● the trunk open request switch (if soequipped) is pushed, when the IntelligentKey is in range of the vehicle or

● the HOLD button on the Intelligent Key ispressed.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they arearound cars to prevent them from playingand becoming locked in the trunk wherethey could be seriously injured. Keep thecar locked, with the rear seatback andtrunk lid securely latched when not in use,and prevent children’s access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism providesa means of escape for children and adults in theevent they become locked inside the trunk.

LPD0395 LPD0396


To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-nated release handle until the lock releases andpush up on the trunk lid. The release handle ismade of a material that glows in the dark after abrief exposure to ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk compart-ment on the interior of the trunk lid.

OPENER OPERATION

The fuel-filler door release is located on the floorto the left of the driver’s seat. To open the fuel-filler door, pull up the release. To lock, close thefuel-filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

LPD0397

FUEL-FILLER DOOR


● Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properlytightened. It may take a few driving tripsfor the message to be displayed. Failureto tighten the fuel-filler cap properlyafter the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning ap-

pears may cause the Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionin this manual.

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise toremove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder �1while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until asingle click is heard.

CoupeLPD0448


Loose Fuel Cap warningThe LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in thevehicle information display when the fuel-fillercap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle hasbeen refueled. It may take a few driving trips forthe message to be displayed. To turn off thewarning, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soonas possible. See “Fuel-filler cap”.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Press the next button �A on the in-strument panel located behind the steeringwheel for about 1 second to turn off theLOOSE FUEL CAP warning �B after tight-ening the fuel-filler cap.

SedanLPD0449 LRS2006


TILT OPERATIONPull the lever �1 all the way toward you andadjust the steering wheel up or down �2 to thedesired position. Lock the wheel by releasing thelever and ensure that the lever has returned to itsoriginal position.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

TELESCOPIC OPERATIONPull the lever �1 all the way toward you andadjust the steering wheel forward or backward indirection �3 , to the desired position. Lock thewheel by releasing the lever and ensure that thelever has returned to its original position.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel anycloser to you than is necessary for propersteering operation and comfort. The driv-er’s air bag inflates with great force. If youare unrestrained, leaning forward, sittingsideways or out of position in any way, youare at greater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive serious orfatal injuries from the air bag if you are upagainst it when it inflates. Always sit backagainst the seatback and as far away aspractical from the steering wheel. Alwaysuse the seat belts.

�1 To block glare from the front, swing down themain sun visor.

�2 To block glare from the side, remove the sunvisor from the center mount and swing thesun visor to the side.

LPD0398

Coupe shown, sedan similarWPD0435

TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING SUN VISORS


�3 Slide the extension sun visor (if so equipped)in or out as needed.

CAUTION

Do not store the sun visor before returningthe extension to its original position.

VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanitymirrors are illuminated and turn on when themirror cover is open.

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The night position �1 reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position �2 when driving in daylighthours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

Coupe shown, sedan similarLPD0400 WPD0126

MIRRORS


AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-cally dims during night time conditions and ac-cording to the intensity of the headlights of thevehicle following you. The automatic anti-glarefeature is activated when the ignition switch is inthe ON position.

The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-matic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors�1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of thesensors, resulting in improper operation. Type A and Type B

The indicator light �2 will illuminate when theautomatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:

● the O button for inside mirrors withoutcompass.

● the button for inside mirrors withcompass.

The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,press:

● the | button for inside mirrors withoutcompass.

● the button for inside mirrors withcompass.

The indicator light will turn on.

For information on HomeLink� Universal Trans-ceiver operation, see the “HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

For information on the compass display (if soequipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of this manual.

Type A-Without compassLPD0469

Type B-With compassLPD0470


OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

● Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

Electric control typeThe outside mirror remote control only operateswhen the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Rotate the control lever to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position bymoving the control lever.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-tional information, see “Rear window and outsidemirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

Manual folding outside mirrors (if soequipped)Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

LPD0346 WPD0056


MEMO


4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voicerecognition systems

Control panel buttons — color screen withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

How to use the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Difference between predicted and actualdistances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Heater and air conditioner (manual)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Audio system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-30Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) PlayerOperation (models with Navigation System) . . . . . . 4-68USB interface (models without NavigationSystem) (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71USB interface (models without NavigationSystem) (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73USB interface(models with Navigation System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75iPod�* player operation without NavigationSystem (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

iPod�* player operation without NavigationSystem (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80iPod�* player operation with NavigationSystem (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82Music Box� (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85Bluetooth� streaming audio (if so equipped) . . . . . . 4-93CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System withoutNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-105List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107Voice Adaptation (VA) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113

Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-118Handset phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-122Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-123Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-123Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-124Call volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-125

NISSAN Voice Recognition System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-125

NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode . . . . .4-126Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129Giving voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129NISSAN Voice Recognition AlternateCommand Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-137Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-142Speaker Adaptation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-145Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-147

WARNING

● Positioning of the heating or air condi-tioning controls and display controlsshould not be done while driving in or-der that full attention may be given tothe driving operation.

● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,fire, or electrical shock.

● Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

● In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact your nearest NISSANdealer. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire or electricalshock.

1. Display screen

2. MAP button*

3. DEST button*

4. ROUTE/VOICE button*

5. INFO button (P. 4-5)

6. SETTING button (P. 4-6)

7. Volume control knob

8. (brightness control) button

LHA2081

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will discharge the battery, and theengine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to akey shown only on the display. These keys can beselected by touching the screen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCHSCREEN

CAUTION

● The glass display screen may break if itis hit with a hard or sharp object. If theglass screen breaks, do not touch it.Doing so could result in an injury.

● To clean the display, never use a roughcloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or anykind of solvent or paper towel with achemical cleaning agent. They willscratch or deteriorate the panel.

● Do not splash any liquid such as wateror car fragrance on the display. Contactwith liquid will cause the system tomalfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-not be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not availablewhile driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-ate the navigation system.

WARNING

● ALWAYS give your full attention todriving.

● Avoid using vehicle features that coulddistract you. If distracted, you couldlose control of your vehicle and causean accident.

Touch screen operationSelecting the item:

Touch an item to select. To select the “Naviga-tion” key, touch the “Navigation” key �1 on thescreen. Touch the “BACK” key �2 to return to theprevious screen.

LHA1227

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

Adjusting the item:

Touch the “+” key �1 or the “�” key �2 to adjustthe settings of an item.

Touch the up arrow �3 to scroll up the page oneitem at a time, or touch the double up arrow �4 toscroll up an entire page.

Touch the down arrow �5 to scroll down thepage one item at a time, or touch the doubledown arrow �6 to scroll down an entire page.

Inputting characters:

Touch the letter or number key �1 .

There are some options available when inputtingcharacters.

● Uppercase:Shows uppercase characters.

● Lowercase:Shows lowercase characters.

● Space:Inserts a space.

● Delete:Deletes the last inputted character with onetouch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key todelete all of the characters.

● OK:Completes the character input.

Touch screen maintenanceIf you clean the display screen, use a dry, softcloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use asmall amount of neutral detergent with a softcloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-tergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe thescreen.LHA1228 LHA1230


HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THESCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-tion is made or menu item is highlighted, differentareas on the screen provide you with importantinformation. See the following for details.

1. Header:Shows the path used to get to the currentscreen (for example, press the SETTINGbutton > then select the “Comfort” key).

2. Menu Selections:Shows the options to choose within thatmenu screen (for example, Auto Interior Illu-mination, etc.).

3. Up/Down Movement Indicator:Shows that the arrows on the touch screenmay be used to move up or down on thescreen and select more options.

4. Screen Count:Shows the number of menu selections avail-able for the current menu, even if they are onmultiple pages (for example, 1/7).

5. Footer/Information Line:Provides more information (if available)about the menu selection currently high-lighted (for example, Cabin lighting whenunlocking doors).

HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON

Press the INFO button; the display screen showsvehicle and navigation information for your con-venience.

Where am I?

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

Traffic Info

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

WHA1401 LHA1402


Weather InfoRefer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

Map UpdateRefer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

Navigation VersionRefer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

GPS PositionFor GPS Position, refer to the separate Naviga-tion System Owner’s Manual.

Voice Recognition settingsFor Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSANVoice Recognition system” in this section.

HOW TO USE THE SETTINGBUTTONWhen the SETTING button is pressed, the Set-tings screen will appear on the display. You canselect and/or adjust several functions, featuresand modes that are available for your vehicle.

LHA1236 LHA1237


Display settingsSelect the “Display” key. On the screen above,select the “Display Adjustment” key. The DisplayAdjustment screen will appear.

Brightness/contrast:

Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” keyto adjust the brightness or contrast of the displaybackground. Touch the “+”or “-” key to adjust thebrightness to darker or brighter and the contrastto lower or higher.

The new settings are automatically saved whenyou exit the setting screen by selecting the“Back” key or any other mode button.

Display off:

Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the“Display ON” turns off and the message abovewill be displayed briefly. When the audio, HVAC(Heater and air conditioner), or any mode buttonon the control panel is operated, the display turnson for that operation. If one of the control panelbuttons is pressed, the display will not automati-cally turn off until that operation is finished. Oth-erwise, the screen turns off automatically after 5seconds.

WHA1502 WHA1503 LHA1242


To turn the screen on:

● Press the SETTING button and select the“Display” key and then select the “DisplayON” key, or

● Press the button and the message“resuming display” will appear and the “Dis-play ON” key will be automatically turned on(no amber indicator).

Background color:

Select the “Background Color” key; the displaycolor changes between day and night.

The new settings are automatically saved whenyou exit the setting screen by selecting the“Back” key or any other mode button. Color theme:

Select the “Display” key, then select the “ColorTheme” key. The Color Theme select screen willappear.

Select the key for the desired color. The appear-ance of the background, arrows and bars willchange for all screens accordingly. You canchoose a black, blue or red color theme.

ClockThe following display will appear after pressingthe SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”key.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-nated), a clock is always displayed in the upperright corner of the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost exactlybecause it is always adjusted by the GPS system.

LHA1240 LHA1241


Clock Format (24h):

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-nated), the clock format will change from thedefault 12-hour display to a 24-hour display.

Offset (hour):

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing thehours.

Offset (minute):

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing theminutes.

Daylight Savings Time:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off thedaylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; theamber indicator light will go out.

Time Zone:

Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zonescreen will appear.

Select one of the following zones, depending onthe current location, by selecting the correct timezone key to enable that time zone (indicator lightwill illuminate for that location).

● Pacific

● Mountain

● Central

● Eastern

● Atlantic

● Newfoundland

● Hawaii

● Alaska

After selection/settings, select the “Back” key orany other mode button to accept the changes.

LHA1243


Others settingsSelect the “Others” key. Comfort settings, lan-guage and units and Voice Recognition settingswill be displayed.

Comfort settings

Select the “Others” key, then select the “Com-fort” key. The Comfort settings screen will bedisplayed.

You can set the following operating conditions byselecting the key for the desired item. The indica-tor light (box at the right of the selected item)alternately turns on and off each time the item istouched.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on orturn off the illumination of the interior lights whenany door is unlocked.

Light Sensitivity: Select to adjust the sensitivityof the automatic headlights higher (right) or lower(left). After selecting the item, touch the “+” or “-”key to change the setting.

Light Off Delay: Select to change the durationof the automatic headlight off timer. After select-ing the item, touch the “+” or “-” key to changethe setting. The available delays are 0, 30, 45, 60,90, 120, 150 and 180 seconds.

LHA1403 WHA1404 LHA1405


Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turnon or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati-cally according to the vehicle speed.

Selective Door Unlock: When this item isturned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked firstafter the door unlock operation. When the doorhandle request switch on the driver’s or frontpassenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,only the corresponding door is unlocked first. Allthe doors can be unlocked if the door unlockoperation is performed again within one minute.

When this item is turned to off, all the doors willbe unlocked after the door unlock operation isperformed once.

Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turnon or turn off the door lock/unlock function bypushing the door handle request switch.

Return All Settings to Default: Select tochange all the comfort and convenience systemsto their default settings.

Language & Units:

Select the “Language & Units” key. Select the keyof the setting you wish to change.

Select Language:

Select the “English” key or the “Français” key tochange the language shown on the display.

If you select the “Français” key, French languagewill be displayed, so please use the French Own-er’s Manual. To obtain a French Owner’s Manual,please see “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Or-der Information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section.

LHA1250 LHA1251


Select Units:

Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”(km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the unitsshown on the display.

Voice Recognition:

For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSANVoice Recognition system” in this section.

Navigation settings

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding these set-tings.

Audio settingsFor audio settings, refer to “Audio System” in thissection.

Phone settingsFor phone settings refer to “Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” inthis section.

Bluetooth� settingsFor Bluetooth� phone settings, refer to“Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System withNavigation System” in this section.

For Bluetooth� audio settings, refer to“Bluetooth� streaming audio” in this section.

Volume & beeps settingsNavigation volume

For navigation volume settings, refer to the sepa-rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for infor-mation regarding these settings.

Phone volume

For phone volume settings refer to “Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-tem” in this section.

Switch beeps

With this option on (indicator light illuminated), abeep will sound if any control panel button ispressed.

BUTTON

To change the display brightness, pressthe button. Pressing the button again willchange the display to the day or thenight display.

If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, thedisplay will return to the previous display.

LHA1252 LHA1253


Press and hold the button for more thantwo seconds to turn the display off. Press thebutton again to turn the display on.

When the shift selector is shifted into the R(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows arearward view from the vehicle.

WARNING

● The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in detecting large stationary ob-jects to help avoid damaging the ve-hicle. The system will not detect smallobjects below the bumper, and may notdetect objects close to the bumper oron the ground.

● The RearView Monitor is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing. Always turn and check that it is safeto do so before backing up. Alwaysback up slowly.

● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-tor differ from actual distance becausea wide-angle lens is used.

● Make sure that the trunk is securelyclosed when backing up.

● Do not put anything on the rearviewcamera. The rearview camera is in-stalled beside the license plate light.

● When washing the vehicle with high-pressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unit causing wa-ter condensation on the lens, a mal-function, fire or an electric shock.

● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-function or cause damage resulting in afire or an electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera.Do not scratch the cover when cleaningdirt or snow from the cover.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYEDLINESLines which indicate the vehicle clearance anddistances to objects with reference to the bum-per line �A are displayed on the monitor.

LHA1254

REARVIEW MONITOR (if soequipped)


They are indicated as reference distances toobjects. The lines and colors in the display indi-cate distances from the back bumper line �A inthe illustration.

�1 1.5 ft (0.5 m) red

�2 3 ft (1 m) yellow

�3 7 ft (2 m) green

�4 10 ft (3 m) green

The vehicle clearance lines are wider thanthe actual clearance.

DIFFERENCE BETWEENPREDICTED AND ACTUALDISTANCESThe distance guide line and the vehicle widthguide line should be used as a reference onlywhen the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. Thedistance viewed on the monitor is for referenceonly and may be different than the actual distancebetween the vehicle and displayed objects.

LHA0437

WHA1504


Backing up on a steep uphillWhen backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-tance guide lines and the vehicle width guidelines are shown closer than the actual distance.For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to theplace �A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance onthe hill is the place �B . Note that any object onthe hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhillWhen backing up the vehicle down a hill, thedistance guide lines and the vehicle width guidelines are shown farther than the actual distance.For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to theplace �A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance onthe hill is the place �B . Note that any object onthe hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

WHA1505


Backing up behind a projecting objectThe position �C is shown farther than the position�B in the display. However, the position �C isactually at the same distance as the position �A .The vehicle may hit the object when backing up tothe position �A if the object projects over theactual backing up course.

ADJUSTING THE SCREENThe procedure for adjusting the quality of thescreen differs depending on the type of screenpresent on the vehicle.

For vehicles without a touch screen (Type A):

● To adjust the Brightness and Contrast,press the ENTER button on the audio sys-tem repeatedly until the desired setting isdisplayed. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob toadjust the display to the desired level.

WHA1506

Type ALHA1272


● Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast ofthe RearView Monitor while the vehicle ismoving.

For vehicles with a touch screen (Type B):

● To adjust the Brightness, Contrast, DisplayON/OFF and Color of the RearView Moni-tor, press the SETTING button and thenselect the “Display” key with the RearViewMonitor on. When the display adjustmentscreen appears, touch the “–” or “+” key onthe desired item and adjust the level.

● Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, andColor of the RearView Monitor while thevehicle is moving.

OPERATING TIPS

● When the shift selector is shifted to R (Re-verse), the monitor screen automaticallychanges to the RearView Monitor mode.However, the radio can be heard.

● It may take some time until the RearViewMonitor is displayed after the shift selectorhas been shifted to R (Reverse). Objectsmay be distorted momentarily until the Rear-View Monitor screen is displayed com-pletely. When the shift selector is returned toa position other than R (Reverse), it may takesome time until the screen changes. Objectson the screen may be distorted until they arecompletely displayed.

● When the temperature is extremely high orlow, the screen may not clearly display ob-jects. This is not a malfunction.

● When strong light directly enters the cam-era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on thescreen. This is due to strong reflected lightfrom the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

● The screen may flicker under fluorescentlight. This is not a malfunction.

● The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-tor may differ somewhat from those of theactual object.

● When the contrast of objects is low at night,pressing the SETTING button or ENTERbutton may not change the brightness.

● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in adark place or at night.

● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,the RearView Monitor may not display ob-jects. Clean the camera.

● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner toclean the camera. This will cause discolor-ation. To clean the camera, wipe with a clothdampened with a diluted mild cleaning agentand then wipe with a dry cloth.

● Do not damage the camera as the monitorscreen may be adversely affected.

● Do not use body wax on the camera window.If body wax does get on the camera window,wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-ened with mild detergent diluted with water.

Type BLHA1238


Adjust air flow direction by moving the ventslides.

Open or close the vents by using the dial. Movethe dial toward the to open the vents ortoward the to close them.

Right and LeftWHA0736

CenterWHA0737

Rear (sedan, if so equipped)WHA0688

VENTS


WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

1. Fan speed control/system OFF dial2. Air flow control buttons3. Temperature control dial4. Air conditioner button5. Rear window defroster6. MAX A/C button7. Front windshield defrost button8. Air recirculation button

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

The air flow control buttons allow you to selectthe air flow outlets.

MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling.

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

WHA1407

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual) (if so equipped)


— Air flows from center and sidevents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster outlets and

foot outlets.— Air flows mainly from defroster

outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To lower thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increasethe temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

On position (Indicator light on):Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

Off position (Indicator light off):Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

The button is provided only on vehicles equippedwith an air conditioner.

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position and push the button toturn on the air conditioner. The indicator lightcomes on when the air conditioner is operating.To turn off the air conditioner, push thebutton again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch

For more information about the rear window de-froster switch, see “Rear window and outsidemirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets and the side vent outlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF positionfor normal heating.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position between the middle and thehot position.

VentilationThis mode directs outside air to the side andcenter vents.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.



4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position.

Defrosting or defoggingThis mode directs the air to the defrost outlets todefrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the defrost/defog button .




● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to the highestsetting and the temperature control to thefull HOT position.

● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (the indi-cator light on the button will come on)if the outside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helpsdefog the windshield. The mode au-tomatically turns off, allowing outside air tobe drawn into the passenger compartmentto further improve the defogging perfor-mance.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the sideand center vents and to the front and rear flooroutlets.





Heating and defoggingThis mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on if the out-side temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).The indicator light on the A/C button willcome on. This dehumidifies the air whichhelps defog the windshield. Themode automatically turns off, allowing out-side air to be drawn into the passengercompartment to further improve the defog-ging performance.

Operating tipsClear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position, and push in the button toactivate the air conditioner. When the air condi-tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functionsare added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.




4. Push the button. the indicator lightcomes on.



● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe ON position. Be sure to return theto the OFF position for normal cooling. MAXA/C may be used for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.




4. Push the button. The indicator lightcomes on.


Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows anddehumidify the air.



● When the or are selected, theair conditioner automatically turns on (theindicator light will illuminate) if the outsidetemperature is more than 36°F (2°C). Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to furtherimprove the defogging performance.


Operating tips

● Keep the windows and moonroof closedwhile the air conditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3minutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from theventilators in hot, humid conditions as the airis cooled rapidly. This does not indicate amalfunction.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. The air recirculationbutton should always be in the OFF posi-tion for heating and defrosting.


LHA2082 WHA1409


LHA2034 LHA2083


LHA2036


1. Driver temperature control dial2. Air flow control buttons3. Passenger temperature control dial4. DUAL button5. Rear defrost button6. Front window defrost button7. Fan speed dial/system OFF button8. Air recirculation button9. A/C ON/OFF button10. AUTO button

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.


● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls toactivate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (AUTO)

This mode may be normally used all year round asthe system automatically works to keep a con-stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the driver’s side temperature controldial to the left or right to set the desiredtemperature. Driver and passenger tem-peratures can be set independently. PressDUAL or turn the passenger temperaturecontrol dial to the left or right to activate dualclimate control functions. Turn the passen-ger’s side temperature control dial to the leftor right to set the desired passenger’s tem-perature.

● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

WHA1171

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) (if so equipped)


● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/offare also controlled automatically.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from thevents in hot, humid conditions as the air iscooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-function.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Press the defroster control button toturn the system on. The indicator light in thebutton will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or rightto set the desired temperature.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of thewindows, turn the manual fan control to HI.

● As soon as possible after the windshield isclean, press the AUTO button to return tothe auto mode.

● When the control is activated, the airconditioner will automatically be turned on atoutside temperatures above 36°F (2°C).This dehumidifies the air which helps defogthe windshield. The air recirculation modeautomatically turns off, allowing outside airto be drawn into the passenger compart-ment to further improve the defogging per-formance.

Rear window defroster switch

For more information about the rear window de-froster switch, see “Rear window and outsidemirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Turn the fan control dial left or right tomanually control the fan speed.

Press the /OFF button to turn the systemoff.

Press the AUTO button to return to automaticcontrol of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Push the air recirculation button to recir-culate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicatorlight on the switch will come on.

The air recirculation button will not be activatedwhen the air conditioner is in DEF or mode.

Air flow controlPress the air flow control buttons to manuallycontrol air flow and select the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

— Air flows from center and sidevents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system off

Press the /OFF button.


OPERATING TIPS● When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flowfrom the foot outlets may not operate for amaximum of 150 seconds. However, this isnot a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-ture warms up, air flow from the foot outletswill operate normally.

The sunload sensor, located on the top of theinstrument panel on the driver’s side, helps thesystem maintain a constant temperature. Do notput anything on or around this sensor.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand oil recommendations” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

WHA0791

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER


RADIO

With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi-tion, press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knobto turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio withthe engine not running, the ignition should beplaced in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise to comefrom the audio system speakers. Storing the de-vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTIONRange: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FMhaving slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-nal influences may sometimes interfere with FMstation reception even if the FM station is within25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal isdirectly related to the distance between thetransmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-acteristics as light. For example, they will reflectoff objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter), static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTIONAM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

AUDIO SYSTEM (if so equipped)


SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)When the satellite radio is used for the first timeor the battery has been replaced, the satelliteradio may not work properly. This is not a mal-function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satelliteradio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal orlarge building for satellite radio to receive all ofthe necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT band option isselected unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XM� satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio isnot available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteantenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna canaffect satellite radio performance. Remove theice to restore satellite radio reception. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player (modelswithout Navigation System)

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD player.

● Only one CD can be loaded into the CDplayer at a time.

● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high or low.Decrease/increase the temperaturebefore use.

● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

LHA0099


● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

● This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs. It has no capability torecord or burn CDs.

● If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

● Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-perature inside the player. Remove theCD by pressing the EJECT button. Aftera short time, reinsert the CD. The CDcan be played when the temperature ofthe player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)CD).

CD/DVD combination player (modelswith Navigation System)

● Do not force a disc into the CD/DVDinsert slot. This could damage theCD/DVD player.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove theCD/DVD and dehumidify or ventilatethe player completely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD/DVD player sometimes cannotfunction when the passenger compart-ment temperature is extremely high.Decrease the temperature before use.

● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video”logo on the disc or packaging.

● Do not expose the CD/DVD to directsunlight.

● CDs/DVDs that are of poor quality,dirty, scratched, covered with finger-prints, or that have pinholes may notwork properly.

● The following CDs/DVDs are not guar-anteed to play:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)


● Recordable compact discs (DVD±R,DVD±R DL)

● Rewritable compact discs(DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL)

● Do not use the following CDs/DVDs asthey may cause the CD/DVD player tomalfunction.

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

● CDs/DVDs that are not round

● CDs/DVDs with a paper label

● CDs/DVDs that are warped,scratched, or have abnormal edges

● This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs/DVDs. It has no capa-bilities to record or burn CDs/DVDs.

● If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one ofthe following messages will be dis-played.

Disc Read Error:

● Confirm that the CD/DVD is insertedcorrectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

● Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bentor warped and it is free of scratches.

Please Eject Disc:

This error may be due to the tempera-ture inside the player getting too high.Remove the CD/DVD by pushing theEJECT button, and after a short timereinsert the CD/DVD. The CD/DVD canbe played when the temperature of theplayer returns to normal. If the errorpersists, consult your local dealership.

Unplayable File:

● The file may be copy protected.

● The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4Aor DIVX type.

Region Invalid

● The DVD is not for region 1 or allregions.

● Use DVDs with a region code “1”,“ALL” or “1 included” for your DVDentertainment system. (The regioncode �A is displayed as a small sym-bol printed on the top of the DVD�B .) This vehicle-installed DVDplayer cannot play DVDs with a re-gion code other than “1” or “ALL”.

Copyright and trademark

● The technology protected by the U.S.patent and other intellectual propertyrights owned by MacrovisionCorporation and other right holders isadopted for this system.

LHA0484


● This copyright protected technologycannot be used without a permit fromMacrovision Corporation. It is limitedto personal use, etc., as long as thepermit from Macrovision Corporationis not issued.

● Modifying or disassembling is prohib-ited.

● Dolby digital is manufactured under li-cense from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

● Dolby and the double D mark “ ”are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories,Inc.

● DTS and DTS Digital Surround “ ”are registered trademarks of DigitalTheater Systems, Inc.

Universal Serial Bus (USB) memory (ifso equipped)This system supports various USB memorysticks, USB hard drives and iPod� players. Thereare some USB devices which may not be sup-ported with this system.

● Make sure that the USB device is connectedcorrectly into the USB connector.

● Do not force the memory stick or USB cableinto the USB connector.

● During cold weather or rainy days, the playermay malfunction due to the humidity. If thisoccurs, remove the USB memory stick anddehumidify or ventilate the player com-pletely.

● The player sometimes cannot function whenthe passenger compartment temperature isextremely high. Decrease the temperaturebefore use.

● Do not leave the USB memory in a placeprone to static electricity or where the airconditioner blows directly. The data in theUSB memory may be damaged.

● Prepare the USB device by yourself be-cause it is not equipped with the vehicle.

● The USB device cannot be formatted withthis system. If you want to format the USBmemory, use your personal computer.

● Partitioned USB devices may not be playedcorrectly.

● Some characters used in other languages(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayedproperly on the vehicle center screen.NISSAN recommends using English lan-guage characters with USB devices.

● Do not connect the USB device if the con-nector or cable is wet. Allow the cableand/or connectors to dry completely beforeconnecting the USB device.

● Large video podcast files cause slow re-sponses in the iPod�. The vehicle centerdisplay may momentarily black out, but it willsoon recover.

● If the iPod� automatically selects large videopodcast files while in the shuffle mode, thevehicle center display may momentarilyblack out, but it will soon recover.

● Audiobooks may not play in the same orderas they appear on the iPod�.

● The iPod� nano (1st Generation) may re-main in fast forward or rewind mode if it isconnected during a seek operation. In thiscase, please manually reset the iPod�.

● The iPod� nano (2nd Generation) will con-tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-nected during a seek operation.

● An incorrect song title may appear when thePlay Mode is changed while using the iPod�nano (2nd generation).


● If you are using an iPod� (3rd Generationwith Dock connector), do not use very longnames for the song title, album name or artistname to avoid the iPod� resetting itself.

iPod� is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.

Bluetooth� streaming audio (if soequipped)

● Some Bluetooth� audio devices may not berecognized by the in-vehicle audio system.

● It is necessary to set up the wireless con-nection between a compatible Bluetooth�audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth�module before using the Bluetooth� audio.

● Operating procedure of the Bluetooth� au-dio will vary depending on the devices. Makesure how to operate your audio device be-fore using it with this system.

● The Bluetooth� audio may be stopped underthe following conditions:

● Receiving a call on the Hands-FreePhone System.

● Checking the connection to the hands-free phone.

● Do not place the Bluetooth� audio device inan area surrounded by metal or far away fromthe in-vehicle Bluetooth� module to preventtone quality degradation and wireless con-nection disruption.

● While an audio device is connected throughthe Bluetooth� wireless connection, the bat-tery power of the device may dischargequicker than usual.

● This system supports the Bluetooth� AudioDistribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.and licensed toClarion Co., Ltd.

Compact disc (CD) with MP3 orWMA (models without NavigationSystem)

Terms:

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well-known compressed digital audiofile format. This format allows for near “CDquality” sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion of anaudio track from CD-ROM can reduce thefile size by approximately a 10:1 ratio withvirtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3compression removes the redundant andirrelevant parts of a sound signal that thehuman ear doesn’t hear.

● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is acompressed audio format created by Micro-soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMAcodec offers greater file compression thanthe MP3 codec, enabling storage of moredigital audio tracks in the same amount ofspace when compared to MP3s at the samelevel of quality.


● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital music file.The size and quality of a compressed digitalaudio file is determined by the bit rate usedwhen encoding the file.

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequencyis the rate at which the samples of a signalare converted from analog to digital (A/Dconversion) per second.

● Multisession — Multisession is one of themethods for writing data to media. Writingdata once to the media is called a singlesession, and writing more than once is calleda multisession.

● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is thepart of the encoded MP3 or WMA file thatcontains information about the digital musicfile such as song title, artist, encoding bitrate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-mation is displayed on the Artist/song titleline on the display.

* Windows� and Windows Media� are regis-tered trademarks and trademarks in the UnitedStates of America and other countries of Micro-soft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMAfiles is as illustrated.

● The names of folders not containing MP3 orWMA files are not shown in the display.

● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,“Root Folder” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which thefiles were written by the writing software.Therefore, the files might not play in thedesired order.

Playback order chartWHA1078


Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RWSupported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supportedversions*1

MP3Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHzBit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHzBit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*201: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.


Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters forfolder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound qualityCheck if the disc is scratched or dirty.Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long timebefore the music startsplaying.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match thespecifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit ratefiles

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to thenext song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, therewill be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back inthe desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.


CD, DVD or USB with CompressedAudio Files (models with NavigationSystem)

The file types supported by this system are MP3,WMA, AAC/M4A and ATRAC3.

Explanation of terms:

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well known compressed digital audiofile format. This format allows for near “CDquality” sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion of anaudio track can reduce the file size by ap-proximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz,Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no percep-tible loss in quality. The compression re-duces certain parts of sound that seem in-audible to most people.

● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is acompressed audio format created by Micro-soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMAcodec offers greater file compression thanthe MP3 codec, enabling storage of moredigital audio tracks in the same amount ofspace when compared to MP3s at the samelevel of quality.

● AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.Audio files that have been encoded withAAC are generally smaller in size and delivera higher quality of sound than MP3.

● ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus — Adaptive Trans-form Acoustic Coding (ATRAC) is a lossyaudio compression format developed bySony.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital music file.The size and quality of a compressed digitalaudio file is determined by the bit rate usedwhen encoding the file.

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequencyis the rate at which the samples of a signalare converted from analog to digital (A/Dconversion) per second.

● Multisession — Multisession is one of themethods for writing data to media. Writingdata once to the media is called a singlesession, and writing more than once is calleda multisession.

● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is thepart of the encoded MP3 or WMA file thatcontains information about the digital musicfile such as song title, artist, album title,encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.ID3 tag information is displayed on theAlbum/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows�, Windows Media� and WindowsVista� are registered trademarks or trademarksof Microsoft Corporation in the United States ofAmerica and/or other countries.


Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD, DVD or USBdevice with compressed audio files is as illus-trated.

● The folder names of folders not containingcompressed audio files are not shown in thedisplay.

● If there is a file in the top level of thedisc/USB, “Root Folder” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which thefiles were written by the writing software, sothe files might not play in the desired order.

Playback order chartWHA1374


Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL, USB 2.0

Supported file systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista� operating system-based computer) are notsupported.UDF Bridge (UDF 1.02 + ISO9660), UDF 1.5, UDF 2.0* VDF 1.5/VDF 2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.USB memory: FAT16, FAT32

Supportedversions*1

MP3Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHzBit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHzBit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4

AAC Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 96 kHzBit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

ATRAC Version ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus

Tag information (Song title and artist name)ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only)WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*301: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF 16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.


Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the CD/DVD/USB device was inserted correctly.Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.AAC”, “.M4A” or “.AA3” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of charac-ters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ-ing application or other text editing applications.Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.Check if the CD/DVD/USB device is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.It takes a relatively long timebefore the music startsplaying.

If there are many folders or file levels on the CD/DVD/USB device, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music startsplaying.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match thespecifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit ratefiles

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to thenext song when playing

If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like “.MP3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, theplayer will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back inthe desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device.


Compressed Video Files (models withNavigation System)Explanation of terms:

● DivX – DivX refers to the DivX� codecowned by Div, Inc. used for a lossy compres-sion of video based on MPEG-4.

● AVI – AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave.It is standard file format originated by Micro-soft Corporation. A .divx encoded file can besaved into the .avi file format for playback onthis system if it meets the requirementsstated in the table in this section. However,all .avi files are not playable on this systemsince different encodings can be used otherthan the DivX� codec.

● ASF – ASF stands for Advanced SystemsFormat. It is file format owned by MicrosoftCorporation. Note: Only .asf files that meetthe requirements stated in the table in thissection can be played.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital video files.The size and quality of a compressed digitalaudio file is determined by the bit rate usedwhen encoding the file.


Requirements for Supporting Video Playback:

Media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory

File Systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD,DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±RWDL

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.* VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.

USB Memory FAT16, FAT32

File Types

.divx, .avi Video Codecs DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6Audio Codecs MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM

.asf Video Codec ISO-MPEG4Audio Codec G.726

Bit Rates.divx, .avi Maximum Average 4 Mbps

Maximum Peak 8 Mbps

Resolution

.divx, .avi Minimum 32 x 32Maximum 720 x 480

.asf Minimum 32 x 32Maximum 720 x 576


1. SEEK/TRACK button2. CD insert slot3. TUNE/FF·REW button4. CD eject button5. AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE

and BALANCE)

6. CLOCK button7. AUX IN jack8. SCAN button9. RDM/RPT button10. PWR/VOL control knob11. AUX button

12. RADIO button13. CD button14. DISP button15. PRESET A·B·C button16. Station select (1 - 6) buttons17. pause/mute button

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-tion precautions” earlier in this section.

Audio main operation

PWR/VOL control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition, then press the PWR/VOL control knob.If you listen to the radio with the engine notrunning, place the ignition in the ACC position.The mode (radio or CD) that was playing imme-diately before the system was turned off resumesplaying.

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.Pressing the PWR/VOL control knob again turnsthe system off.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right toincrease volume or to the left to decrease volume.

LHA0728


AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade andBalance)

Press the AUDIO button to change the mode asfollows:

Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → BeepON/OFF → Audio → Bass

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance pressthe AUDIO button until the desired mode ap-pears in the display. Press the

TUNE/FF·REW or to adjust Bassand Treble to the desired level. You can also usethe TUNE/FF·REW button to adjust Fade andBalance mode. Fade adjusts the sound level be-tween the front and rear speakers and Balanceadjusts the sound between the right and leftspeaker.

To turn the Beep sound off or on, press theAUDIO button until Beep is displayed. Press the

TUNE/FF·REW button or until thedesired mode is displayed. This turns on or turnsoff the beep sound when audio buttons arepressed.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

DISP (display) button:

Pressing the DISP (display) button will show textabout CD information in the audio display.

If the text information is to long to fully be dis-played on the screen; press and hold the DISPbutton for longer than 1.5 seconds to scrollthrough the rest of the text.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CDwith text, press the DISP button. The DISP buttonwill allow you to scroll

through CD text as follows: Track number andTrack time → Album title → Song title.

● Track number displays the track number se-lected on the disc.

● Track time displays the amount of time thetrack has played.

● Album title displays the title of the CD beingplayed.

● Song title displays the title of the selectedCD track.

Clock operation

Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clockwith the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK buttonagain to turn off the clock display.

Clock set

1. Press and hold the CLOCK button for ap-proximately 2 seconds.

2. The display will show “H-Seek M-Tune”.

3. Press the SEEK/TRACK buttonor to adjust the hours.

4. Press TUNE/FF·REW buttonor to adjust the minutes.

5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit theclock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 10 seconds, or you may press the CLOCKbutton again to return to the regular clock display.

pause/mute button:

To mute or pause the audio sound, press

the pause/mute button. Press thebutton again to resume the audio sound.


FM/AM radio operation

FM/AM band select:

Pressing the RADIO button will change the bandas follows:

AM ←→ FM

When the RADIO button is pressed while theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the station last played.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIObutton is pressed, the compact disc will auto-matically be turned off and the last radio stationplayed will come on.

The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio automatically changesfrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE/FF·REW (tuning)

button:

Press the TUNE/FF·REW button orfor manual tuning. To move quickly through thechannels, hold the tuning buttons down.

SEEK (tuning) button:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button orto tune from high to low or low to high frequen-cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN (tuning) button:

Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in thedisplay window. Scan tuning begins from low tohigh frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 sec-onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-cient signal strength. When scanning, SCANblinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN buttonagain during this 5 second period stops scantuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio tothe A, B and C preset button in any combinationof AM or FM stations.

1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to changebetween storage banks. The radio displaysthe icon A, B or C to indicate which set ofpresets are active.

2. Tune to the desired station using manualTUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any ofthe desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)until a beep sound is heard. (The radio muteswhen the select button is pressed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operationPlace the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition, and carefully insert the compact discinto the slot with the label side up. The compactdisc is automatically pulled into the slot and startsto play.

If the radio is already operating, it automaticallyturns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turnsoff and the last used compact disc starts to play.


TUNE/FF·REW (Fast For-

ward, Rewind) button:

When the TUNE/FF·REW button oris pressed while the compact disc is playing, thecompact disc plays at an increased speed whilefast forwarding or rewinding. When the button isreleased, the compact disc returns to normal playspeed.

SEEK/TRACK button:

When is pressed while the compact discis playing, the next track following the presentone starts to play from the beginning.Press several times to skip several tracks.Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-pears in the display window. (When the last trackon the compact disc is skipped, the first track isplayed.)

When is pressed, the track being playedreturns to the beginning. Press severaltimes to skip back several tracks. Each time thebutton is pressed the CD moves back 1 track.

pause/mute button:

To pause the sound while a CD is playing, pressthe pause/mute button. “Pause” is shownon the display. Press the button again toresume playing the CD.

RDM/RPT button:

When the RDM/RPT button is pressed while thecompact disc is being played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

Random Disc ←→ Repeat Track ←→ Normal

Random Disc: The order of the tracks on the discwill be mixed during play.

Repeat Track: The track that is currently playingwill be repeated.

SCAN (CDs) button:

Press the SCAN button less than 1.5 seconds toscan all tracks of the current disc for 10 secondsper track. The SCAN icon is flashed during scanmode.

The scan mode is canceled once it scans throughall tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button ispressed during scan mode.

CD EJECT:

When the button is pressed with a com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

When the button is pressed while thecompact disc is playing, the compact disc willeject and the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator:

A CD icon indicator appears on the display whena CD is loaded with the system on.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. TheAUX IN audio input jack accepts any standardanalog audio input such as from a portable cas-sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-puters.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible devicewhen it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.


1. SCAN button2. Station select (1 - 6) buttons3. CD insert slot4. Display screen5. iPod� MENU button6. CD eject button

7. SEEK/CATEGORY button8. SETTING/ENTER button, SCROLL/

TUNE knob9. AUX IN jack10. AUX button11. CD button

12. AM-FM button13. RPT button14. VOL/ON-OFF control knob15. RDM button

*No satellite radio reception is availablewhen the AUX button is pressed to ac-cess satellite radio stations unless op-tional satellite receiver and antenna areinstalled and an XM� satellite radio ser-vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaiiand Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER(Type A) (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-tion precautions” earlier in this section.


VOL/ON·OFF control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knobwhile the system is off to call up the mode (radioor CD) that was playing immediately before thesystem was turned off.

WHA1475


To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFFcontrol knob.

Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. When this featureis active, the audio volume changes as the drivingspeed changes.

Setting control knob (Audio, Display andClock):

Press the SETTING button to adjust the audio,display and clock settings as follows:

Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → SpeedSensitive Volume (SSV) → Brightness → Con-trast → On-screen Clock → Clock Adjust →Bass

Once the desired setting is displayed on thescreen, turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob left or rightto adjust the chosen setting. Press the SETTINGbutton to move to the next setting or wait approxi-mately five seconds to exit the setting adjustmentmode.

Audio settings:

Adjust the bass, treble, fade and balance byselecting the desired setting with the SETTINGbutton and then adjusting the level with theSCROLL/TUNE knob. Balance adjusts thesound between the left and right speakers. Fadeadjusts the sound between the front and rearspeakers.

Speed Sensitive Volume:

To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)level from 1 to 5, or to turn the feature off entirely,choose the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) set-ting with the SETTING button and then adjust thelevel with the SCROLL/TUNE knob. Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) adjusts the volume of theaudio system as the vehicle’s driving speedchanges.

LHA1270 LHA1271


Display settings:

To adjust the brightness or contrast of the displayscreen, press the SETTING button until the cho-sen setting is displayed. Use the SCROLL/TUNEknob to adjust the display to the desired level.

On-screen Clock:

The clock is shown in the upper right corner ofthe screen. To turn this feature off or to re-enablethe clock display after it has been turned off,press the SETTING button until the On-screenClock mode is displayed. Use theSCROLL/TUNE knob to toggle the feature on oroff.

Clock adjust:

To adjust the time, perform the following steps:

1. Press the SETTING button repeatedly untilthe Clock Adjust mode is displayed on thescreen.

2. The hours will begin blinking. Adjust thehours by turning the SCROLL/TUNE knobleft or right and press the ENTER button.

3. The minutes will begin blinking. Adjust theminutes by turning the SCROLL/TUNE knobleft or right and press the ENTER button.

LHA1272 LHA1273 LHA1274


iPod� MENU button

This button can only be used for iPod� opera-tions. See “iPod� player operation without Navi-gation System” later in this section for detailsabout the function of this button.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

AM·FM button:

Press the AM·FM button to change the band asfollows:

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

If another audio source is playing when theAM·FM button is pressed, the audio source play-ing will automatically be turned off and the lastradio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown onthe screen during FM stereo reception. When thestereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-matically changes from stereo to monaural re-ception.

SAT band select:

Pressing the AUX button will change the band asfollows:

AUX → XM1* → XM2* → AUX (satellite, if soequipped)

When the AUX button is pressed while the igni-tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed to turnthe radio on.

*When the AUX button is pressed, the satelliteradio mode will be skipped unless an optionalsatellite receiver and antenna are installed and anXM� satellite radio service subscription is active.Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaiiand Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the AUX buttonis pressed, the compact disc will automatically beturned off and the last radio station played willcome on.

SCROLL/TUNE knob (Tuning):

Turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob to the left or rightfor manual tuning.

SEEK tuning:

Press the SEEK/CATEGORY buttonor to tune from low to high or high to lowfrequencies and to stop at the next broadcastingstation.

SCAN tuning:

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appearon the screen while the radio is scan tuning.

Pressing the button again during this 5 secondperiod will stop SCAN tuning and the radio willremain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button isnot pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuningmoves to the next station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations:

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 forFM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set forthe AM band.

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2using the AM·FM select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard.




If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operationIf the radio is already operating, it automaticallyturns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio willautomatically be turned off and the compact discwill start to play. CD/MP3 display mode:

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain textmay be displayed on the screen if the CD hasbeen encoded with text information. Dependingon how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-played.

The track number and the total number of tracksin the current folder or on the current disc aredisplayed on the screen as well. For example, thefirst track out of fourteen total is currently playing.

SEEK/CATEGORY

(Reverse or Fast Forward)

button:

Press and hold the SEEK/CATEGORY

button or for 1.5 seconds while thecompact disc is playing to reverse or fast forwardthe track being played. The compact disc plays atan increased speed while reversing or fast for-warding. When the button is released, the com-pact disc returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CATEGORY button:

Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button whilea CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to thebeginning of the current track. Press theSEEK/CATEGORY button several timesto skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button whilea CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advanceone track. Press the SEEK/CATEGORYbutton several times to skip forward sev-eral tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped, thefirst track on the disc is played. If the last track ina folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the firsttrack of the next folder is played.

LHA1275


SCROLL/TUNE knob (MP3/WMA CDonly):

If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-ing, turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob to changefolders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back afolder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead afolder.

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while a com-pact disc is playing, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

CD:

1 TRK RPT ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRK RPT → OFF

1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.

1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be re-peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed onthe screen unless no pattern is applied.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while a com-pact disc is playing, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

CD:

1 DISC RDM ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 DISC RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → OFF

1 DISC RDM: all tracks on the disc will be playedrandomly.

1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folderwill be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. Theindicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed onthe screen unless no pattern is applied.

AUX button:

The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. TheAUX IN audio input jack accepts any standardanalog audio input such as from a portable cas-sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptopcomputer.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible deviceplugged into the AUX IN jack. The AUX button isalso used to switch the audio system to a source

plugged into the USB input jack in the centerconsole. When a device is plugged into the AUXIN jack while another device is plugged into theUSB input jack, the AUX button is used to togglebetween the two functions.

For more information about the USB input jack,see “USB interface” in this section.

EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with a com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject andthe last source will be played.

When the button is pressed twice with acompact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected further for easier CD removal. If the discis not removed within 20 seconds, the disc willreload.

Additional featuresFor more information about the iPod� playeravailable with this system, see “iPod� player op-eration without Navigation System (Type A)” inthis section.

For more information about the USB interfaceavailable with this system, see “USB interface(models without Navigation System) (Type A)” inthis section.


1. CD·AUX button2. FM·AM band select button3. CD eject button4. XM� band select button5. DISP (display) button6. Color display

7. iPod� MENU button8. Rewind button for SEEK/TRACK9. Radio SCAN tuning button10. Fast forward button for SEEK/TRACK11. BACK button

12. PWR (power) button/VOL (volume)control knob

13. CD RPT (repeat) play button14. CD RDM (random) play button15. Radio station preset select buttons16. AUX IN jack17. TUNE·SCROLL control dial18. ENTER/SETTING buttonFM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER(Type B) (if so equipped)For all operation precautions, see �Audio opera-tion precautions� in this section.

No satellite radio reception is available when theXM� (satellite) band option is selected unless theoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled, and there is an active XM� Satellite Radiosubscription.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM�Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio isnot available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

It may take some time to receive the activationsignal after subscribing the XM� Satellite Radio.After receiving the activation signal, an availablechannel list will be automatically updated in theradio. For XM�, place the ignition switch fromLOCK to ACC to update the channel list.

LHA2097


Audio main operationHead unit:

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low andhigh frequency ranges automatically in both radioreception and CD playback.

PWR/Volume control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition, and then press the PWR button to turnthe audio system on. The mode (the radio or CDplayer for example) that was playing immediatelybefore the audio system or vehicle was turned offresumes playing. While the system is on, press-ing the PWR button turns the system off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

SETTING button:

The settings screen appears when the SETTINGbutton is pressed.

The following items are available in the settingsscreen.

● Bass, Treble, Balance and FadeAdjusts the sound of the audio system. Bal-ance adjusts the sound between the left andright speakers. Fade adjusts the sound be-tween the front and rear speakers.

Turn the TUNE·SCROLL control dial to se-lect the Bass, Treble, Balance or Fade and

then press the ENTER button. Turn theTUNE·SCROLL control dial again to adjustthe Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade to thepreferred level.

● Speed Sensitive Volume (Speed Sens Vol.)To change the Speed Sensitive Volume(Speed Sens Vol.) level from 0 (off) to 5, turnthe TUNE·SCROLL control dial until the de-sired level is displayed and press the ENTERbutton.

● AUX Vol.Controls the volume level of incoming soundwhen an auxiliary device is connected to thesystem. Choose a setting between 1 and 3or choose 0 to turn the feature off.

● Brightness and ContrastAdjust the brightness and contrast of thescreen.

Select the Bass, Treble, Balance or Fadeand then press the ENTER button. Turn theTUNE·SCROLL control dial to adjust thebrightness and contrast of the screen to thepreferred level.

● Clock AdjustAdjust the clock using the following proce-dure.

1. Select Clock Adjust and then press the EN-TER button.

2. Adjust the hour with the TUNE·SCROLLcontrol dial and then press the ENTER but-ton.

3. Adjust the minute with the TUNE·SCROLLcontrol dial and then press the ENTER but-ton.

24 hour clock is not available.

● On-Screen ClockWhen this item is turned on, the clock isdisplayed on the screen.

Select the On-Screen Clock and then pressthe ENTER button. You can toggle betweenON and OFF using the TUNE·SCROLL con-trol dial.

● RDS DisplayWhen this has been set to ON, RDS (radiodata system) information will be shown onthe display. Select RDS Display and thenpress the ENTER button. You can togglebetween ON and OFF using theTUNE·SCROLL control dial.

● iPod Menu languageThe iPod menu language can be set to Eng-lish, French or Spanish. Select iPod menulanguage and then press the ENTER button.Use the TUNE·SCROLL control dial to se-lect the preferred language.


DISP button:

The display screen can be turned off by pressingthe DISP button. You can listen to music while thedisplay is off. If you want to turn the screen on,either press the DISP button or press the FM·AM,XM or CD·AUX button.

Switching the display:

Pressing the CD·AUX button switches the dis-plays as follows:

CD → iPod�/USB → AUX → CD

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

Radio (FM/AM) band select:

Press the radio band select button to change theband as follows:


XM radio (SAT) band select:

Press the radio band select button to change theband as follows:

XM1 → XM2 → XM3 → XM1

When the radio band select button is pressedwhile the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition, the radio will come on at the channel lastplayed.

The last channel played will also come on whenthe PWR button is pressed to ON.

The satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Ha-waii and Guam.

If another audio source is playing when the radioband select button is pressed, the audio sourceautomatically turns off and the last radio channelplayed comes on.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, theradio automatically changes from stereo to mon-aural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

● For AM and FM radioTurn the radio TUNE dial for manual tuning.

● For XM Satellite RadioTurn the radio TUNE dial to seek channelsfrom all of the categories when any categoryis not selected.

SEEK tuning/CAT

(category):

● For AM and FM radio

Press the SEEK button or totune from low to high or high to low frequen-cies and to stop at the next broadcastingstation.

● For XM Satellite Radio

Press the SEEK button or totune to the first channel of the next or previ-ous category.

SCAN tuning:

Press the SCAN tuning button to tune from lowto high frequencies and stop at each broadcast-ing station/channel for 5 seconds. Pressing thebutton again during this 5 seconds period willstop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tunedto that station/channel.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pressed within 5seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the nextstation/channel.

�1 to �6 Station memory operations:

12 stations/channels can be set for the FM band(6 each for FM1 and FM2), 12 for XM radio (6each for XM1 and XM2) and 6 stations can be setfor the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band using the radio bandselect button.

2. Tune to the desired station/channel usingthe SEEK·CAT, SCAN button or the radioTUNE dial.

3. Press and hold the desired station presetbutton �1 to �6 until the radio beeps.


4. Preset: XX is displayed on the screen.Memorizing is now complete.


If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be erased. In thatcase, reset the desired stations/channels.

Compact Disc (CD) player operationPlace the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and insert the Compact Disc (CD) intothe slot with the label side facing up. The CD willbe guided automatically into the slot and startplaying.

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain textmay be displayed on the screen if the CD hasbeen encoded with text information. Dependingon how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-played.

The track number and the total number of tracksin the current folder or on the current disc aredisplayed on the screen as well.

If the radio is already operating, it automaticallyturns off and the CD will play.

If the audio system is turned off while the CD isplaying, the CD plays when the audio system isturned back on.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.

PLAY:

When the CD·AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the CD loaded, the system willturn on and the CD will start to play.

When the CD·AUX button is pressed with the CDloaded and the radio playing, the radio will auto-matically be turned off and the CD will start toplay.

Next/Previous Track and

Fast Forward/Rewind:

Press and hold the or button for 1.5seconds while the CD is playing to reverse or fastforward the track being played. The track plays atan increased speed while reversing or fast for-warding. When the button is released, the CDreturns to normal play speed.

Press the or button for less than 1.5seconds while the CD is playing to return to thebeginning of the current track or to play the nexttrack. Press the button several times to skip for-ward or backwards several tracks.

TUNE·SCROLL control dial (MP3/WMA CDonly):

If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-ing, turn the TUNE·SCROLL control dial to

change folders. Turn the dial to the left to skipback a folder. Turn the dial to the right to skipahead a folder.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pressed while the CD isplayed, the play pattern can be changed as fol-lows:

(CD)

Normal ←→ 1 Track Repeat

(CD with compressed audio files)

Normal → 1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat →Normal

RANDOM (RDM):

When the RDM button is pressed while a CD isbeing played, the play pattern can be changed asfollows:

(CD)

Normal ←→ 1 Disc Random

(CD with compressed audio files)

Normal → 1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random→ Normal


CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pressed with theCD loaded, the CD ejects and the last sourceplays.

The CD automatically reloads if it is notremoved from the slot to protect the CD.

AUX IN jack:

The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit. TheAUX IN audio input jack accepts any standardanalog audio input such as from a portable cas-sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-puter.

CD·AUX button:

When the CD·AUX button is pressed with nodevice plugged into the jack, the audio systemdoes not change to the AUX mode.

NISSAN recommends using a stereo mini plugcable when connecting your music device to theaudio system. Music may not play properly whena monaural cable is used.

Additional featuresFor more information about the iPod� playeravailable with this system, see “iPod� player op-eration without Navigation System (Type B)” inthis section.

For more information about the USB interfaceavailable with this system, see “USB interface(models without Navigation System) (Type B)” inthis section.


1. OPEN/TILT button (Screen tilts down toexpose CD/DVD insert slot)

2. Display screen3. SETTING button4. AUDIO button/control knob5. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

6. Seeking button7. VOL/ON·OFF control knob8. DISC·AUX button9. XM button*10. FM·AM button

11. button

*No satellite radio reception is availablewhen the XM button is pressed to ac-cess satellite radio stations unless op-tional satellite receiver and antenna areinstalled and an XM� satellite radio ser-vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaiiand Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH CD/DVDPLAYER (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see �Audio opera-tion precautions� in this section.


VOL/ON·OFF control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knobwhile the system is off to call up the mode thatwas playing immediately before the system wasturned off.

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFFcontrol knob.

Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust thevolume.

LHA1391


This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-ing speed changes.

AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Bal-ance and Fade):

Press the AUDIO control knob to change themode as follows:

Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, pressthe AUDIO control knob until the desired modeappears in the display. Turn the tuning knob toadjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. Youcan also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade andBalance modes. Fade adjusts the sound levelbetween the front and rear speakers and Balanceadjusts the sound between the right and leftspeakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO control knob re-peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.If the control knob is not pressed for approxi-mately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display willautomatically reappear.

Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):

To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, pressthe SETTING button. Select the “Audio” key todisplay the audio settings screen. Select the “–”key or “+” key to change the SSV level.

While in this screen you can also adjust the otheraudio settings by selecting the correspondingkey.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, select the “Back” key.

LHA1236 LHA1256


Display album cover art:

When an audio source encoded with albumcover art is played, the album cover art can bedisplayed on the screen. To toggle this feature onor off, touch the “Display Album Cover Art” key.When the feature is activated, the amber indica-tor next to the word ON will illuminate.

CD, DVD or USB with compressed audiofiles

While listening to a CD or compressed audiofiles, certain text might be able to be displayed(when CD encoded with text is being used).

Depending on how the CD or compressed audiofiles are encoded, the following text might bedisplayed:

● Folder displays the name of the currentfolder being accessed.

● File displays the name of the file currentlyplaying.

● Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of thesong name.

● Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of thealbum name.

● Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of theartist’s name.

Some of this text might not display while playing aregular CD.

FM/AM/SAT radio operationFM/AM band select:

Pressing the FM·AM button will change the bandas follows:


When the FM·AM button is pressed while theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.

If a compact disc is playing when the FM·AMbutton is pressed, the compact disc will auto-matically be turned off and the last radio stationplayed will come on.

LHA1257 LHA1258


The FM stereo indicator STEREO will illuminateduring FM stereo reception. When the stereobroadcast signal is weak, the radio will automati-cally change from stereo to monaural reception.

XM band select:

Press the XM button to change the band asfollows:

XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if soequipped)

When the XM button is pressed while the ignitionswitch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio willcome on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satelliteradio reception will not be available unless anoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM� satellite radio service sub-scription is active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM buttonis pressed, the compact disc will automatically beturned off and the last radio station played willcome on.

TUNE/FOLDER (Tuning) knob:

To manually tune the radio, turn theTUNE/FOLDER knob to the right or left.

Seeking button:

For AM or FM:Press the side of the seeking button totune from high to low frequencies and stop at thenext broadcasting station. Press the sideof the seeking button to tune from low to highfrequencies and stop at the next broadcastingstation.

For XM:

Press the or side of the seekingbutton to go to the first channel of the previous ornext category.

1 to 6 Station memory operations:

Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelvestations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for theXM radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3 – if soequipped).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2using the FM·AM select button, or choosethe satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 usingthe XM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using

the seeking button. Press andhold any of the desired station memory but-tons (1 – 6) until the preset number is up-dated on the display and the sound is brieflymuted.



If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

List (AM and FM)

Select the “List” key to see a list of the presets inthe AM, FM1 or FM2 preset banks.


Menu (XM, if so equipped)

Select the “Menu” key to see a list of options:

● Preset List – Displays the list of presets.Press and hold the key on the touchscreento save a preset.

● Customize Channel List – deselect chan-nels to skip while using the TUNE/FOLDERknob.

● Favorite Artist & Songs

– Tags the current artist or song playing onXM as a favorite.

– Turn the Alert ON to indicate whenever afavorite artist or song is playing on XM.The audio system must be playing XMradio for this feature to work.

– Delete a favorite artist or song.

● Categories – Displays a category list for XMradio. Select a category to select the firstchannel for that category.

● Direct Tune – Tune to a channel by enteringthe channel number.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Station specific text.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, thetext information is automatically displayed.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition. The CD/DVD insert slot is located be-hind the display screen. To insert a CD, press theOPEN/TILT button on the audio unit. The displayscreen will automatically move down to exposethe CD/DVD insert slot. Insert the CD into theslot with the label side facing up. The CD will beguided automatically into the slot and begin play-ing. To return the display screen to its uprightposition after the CD is inserted, press theOPEN/TILT button again.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

LHA1375 LHA1413


If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing theVOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compactdisc.

DISC·AUX button:

When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded, thesystem will turn on and the compact disc will startto play.

When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with thecompact disc loaded but the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off and thecompact disc will start to play.

Seeking button:

When the side of the seeking button ispressed while a compact disc is playing, the trackbeing played returns to its beginning. Press sev-eral times to skip back through tracks. The com-pact disc will go back the number of times thebutton is pressed.

When the side of the seeking button ispressed while the compact disc is playing, thenext track will start to play from its beginning.Press several times to skip through tracks. Thecompact disc will advance the number of times

the button is pressed. (When the last track on thecompact disc is skipped through, the first trackwill be played.)

Seeking (Rewind and

Fast Forward) button:

Press and hold the side of the seekingbutton or the side of the seeking buttonwhile a compact disc is playing; the compact discwill play while rewinding or fast forwarding. Whenthe button is released, the compact disc willreturn to normal play speed.

TUNE/FOLDER knob

While playing a CD with compressed audio files,turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob right or left to playthe next or previous folder.

CD menu

Touch the “Menu” key on the display while a CDor CD with compressed audio files is playing tobring up a list of options. Depending on the typeof CD being played, the following options may beavailable:

LHA1258


● Play Mode

This option allows you to alter the play pattern ofthe CD. Touch the key of the mode you wish toapply. The modes change the play pattern asfollows:

1 Track Repeat - the current track is repeated.

1 Disc Random- tracks from the entire disc areplayed randomly.

1 Folder Repeat (compressed audio files CDonly) - the current folder is repeated.

1 Folder Random (compressed audio files CDonly) - tracks from the current folder are playedrandomly.

Normal - Plays all tracks on the CD in sequentialorder until stopped.

● Folder List

The folders on the disc are displayed. Select thekey of a folder name to begin playing tracks fromthat folder.

LHA1259 LHA1262 LHA1260


● Track List

The tracks on the disc are displayed. Select thekey of a track name to begin playing that track.

● Title Text Priority

● Record to Music Box, Automatic Recording,Recording Quality

For more information about these options, see“Music Box�” in this section.

CD EJECT button:

To eject a CD, press the OPEN/TILT button tolower the display screen. Once the screen is inthe lowered position, press the button tothe left of the CD/DVD insert slot �1 . The CD willbe ejected.

When the button is pressed while the CDis being played, the CD will eject and the systemwill turn off.

LHA1261 LHA1267 LHA1415


AUX (auxiliary) input jacks

The auxiliary input jacks are located inside thecenter console �1 . NTSC compatible devicessuch as video games, camcorders and portablevideo players can be connected to the auxiliaryinput jacks. Audio devices, such as some MP3players, can also be connected to the systemthrough the auxiliary input jacks.

The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden-tification purposes:

● Red – right channel audio input

● White – left channel audio input

● Yellow – video input

Before connecting a device to the auxiliary inputjacks, turn off the power of the portable device.

With a compatible device connected to the aux-iliary input jacks, press the DISC·AUX buttonrepeatedly until the AUX mode appears in thedisplay. The output from the device will be playedthrough the display (when the vehicle is in the (P)Park position and the parking brake engaged)and audio system.

AUX settings

Select the “Settings” key.

The display mode can be set to Normal, Wide orCinema. The volume setting can be set to Low,Medium or High.

Additional features

For more information about the iPod� playeravailable with this system, see “iPod� player op-eration with Navigation System” in this section.

For more information about the USB interfaceavailable with this system, see “USB interface(models with Navigation System)” in this section.

WHA1532 WHA1393


For more information about the Music Box� fea-ture available with this system, see “Music Box�”in this section.

For more information about the Bluetooth�streaming audio feature available with this sys-tem, see “Bluetooth� streaming audio” in thissection.

DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD)PLAYER OPERATION (models withNavigation System)

Precautions

Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-ment system.

Movies will not be shown on the front displaywhile the vehicle is in any drive position to reducedriver distraction. Audio is available when a movieis played. To view movies on the front display,stop the vehicle in a safe location, move the shiftselector to the P (Park) position and apply theparking brake.

WARNING

● The driver must not attempt to operatethe DVD system or wear the head-phones while the vehicle is in motion sothat full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

● Do not attempt to modify the system todisplay a movie on the front screenwhile the vehicle is being driven. Doingso may distract the driver and maycause a collision and serious personalinjury or death.

CAUTION

● Only operate the DVD while the vehicleengine is running. Operating the DVDfor extended periods of time with theengine OFF can discharge the vehiclebattery.

● Do not allow the system to get wet.Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-uids may cause the system tomalfunction.

● While playing VIDEO-CD media, thisDVD player does not guarantee com-plete functionality of all VIDEO-CDformats.

LHA1394


Playing a DVDInserting/Ejecting the DVD

The CD/DVD insert slot is located behind thedisplay screen. To insert the DVD, press theOPEN/TILT button on the audio unit. The displayscreen will automatically move down to exposethe CD/DVD insert slot. Insert the DVD into theslot with the label side facing up. The DVD will beguided automatically into the slot and begin play-ing. To return the display screen to its uprightposition after the DVD is inserted, press theOPEN/TILT button again.

To eject a DVD, press the OPEN/TILT button tolower the display screen. Once the screen is inthe lowered position, press the button tothe left of the CD/DVD insert slot �1 . The DVDwill be ejected.

DISC-AUX button

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the frontseat occupants to operate the DVD drive whilewatching the images.

Press the DISC-AUX button until the DVD modeis active on the display.

When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed auto-matically.

The operation screen will be turned on when theDISC-AUX button is pressed while a DVD isplaying. The operation screen will turn off auto-matically after a period of time. To turn it on again,press the DISC-AUX button.

DVD operation keys

When the DVD is playing without the operationscreen being shown, you may use the touch-screen to select items from the displayed video.When the operation screen is being shown, usethe touchscreen to select an item from the dis-played menus.

PAUSE:

Select the key to pause the DVD. To re-sume playing the DVD, use the key.

LHA1415 LHA1376


PLAY:

Select the key to start playing the DVD orresume playing the DVD after it has been paused.

STOP:

Select the key to stop playing the DVD.

NEXT/PREVIOUSCHAPTER:

Select the key to skip the chapter(s) of thedisc forward. Select the key to skip thechapter(s) of the disc backward. The chapterswill advance forward or backward the number oftimes the respective key is touched.

CM SKIP:

This function is only for DVD-VIDEO and DVD-

VR. Select the or key to fast forwardor rewind a set interval of time based on the CMsettings. For more information, see “DVD set-tings” in this section.

Next/Prev:This function is only for DVD-AUDIO. Select the“+” or “-” key to advance or rewind the still image.The still image will advance or rewind the numberof times the key is touched.

Top Menu:

When the “Top Menu” key is selected while theDVD is playing, the top menu specific to eachdisc will be displayed. For details, see the instruc-tions attached to the disc.

DVD settings

Select the “Settings” key to adjust the followingsettings:

● Key (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)Displays the operation keys for the specificDVD menu.

– Select the directional keys to move thecursor on the DVD menu.

– Select the “Enter” key to fix the selectedmenu item.

– Select the “Move” key to move the loca-tion of the operation keys on the screen.

– Select the “Back” key to return to theprevious menu screen.

– Select the “Hide” key to hide the opera-tion keys.

● Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO)Some menus specific to each disc will beshown. For details, see the instructions at-tached to the disc.

● Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)The scene with the specified title will bedisplayed the number of times the “+” or “-”side is selected.

● Group Search (DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO CD)The scene with the specified group will bedisplayed the number of times the “+” or “-”side is selected.

● 10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD,CD-DA, DVD-VR)Select the “10 Key Search” key to open thenumber entry screen. Input the number youwant to search for and select the “OK” key.The specified Title/Chapter or Group/Trackwill be played.

● Select No. (VIDEO CD)Select the “Select No.” key to open thenumber entry screen. Input the number youwant to search for and select the “OK” key.The specified scene will be played.

● Angle (DVD-VIDEO)If the DVD contains different angles (such asmoving images), the current image anglecan be switched to another one. Select the“Angle” key and use the “+” or “-” key tochange the angle.


● Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO)When this item is turned on, an angle markwill be shown on the bottom of the screen ifthe scene can be seen from a different angle.

● Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO)DVD menus are automatically configuredand the contents will be played directlywhen the “Menu Skip” key is turned on. Notethat some discs may not be played directlyeven if this item is turned on.

● CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO)Select the “CM Skip” key to choose thesetting time for CM backward and forwardoperations. Use the “+” or “-” key to choosea setting time of 15, 30 or 60 seconds.

● DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-matically adjusts the soundtrack volumelevel to maintain a more even sound to thespeakers.

● DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD)Select the “DVD Language” key to open thenumber entry screen. Input the number cor-responding to the preferred language andselect the “OK” key. The DVD top menulanguage will be changed to the one speci-fied.

● DisplayAdjust the image quality of the screen byselecting the preferred adjustment items.

● AudioChoose the preferred language for the au-dio.

● Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)Choose the preferred language for the sub-titles.

● Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD,DVD-VR)Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or“Cinema” mode.

● Title List (DVD-VR)Choose the preferred title from the list.

● Play ModeChoose the preferred play mode.

● PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR)Choose from the “PG” or “PL” mode.

USB INTERFACE (models withoutNavigation System) (Type A) (if soequipped)

Connecting a device to the USB inputjack

The USB input jack is located in the center con-sole. Open the protective cover �1 on the USBjack, then insert the USB device into the jack.

When a compatible storage device is pluggedinto the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-age device can be played through the vehicle’saudio system.

WHA1530


Audio file operationAUX button:

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACCposition and press the AUX button to switch tothe USB input mode. If another audio source isplugged in through the AUX IN jack on the radio,the AUX button toggles between the twosources.

Play information

Information about the audio files being playedcan be displayed on the display screen of thevehicle’s audio system. Depending on how theaudio files are encoded, information such asFolder, Song and Artist will be displayed.

The track number and number of total tracks inthe folder are displayed on the screen as well. Forexample, the fourth track out of twelve total iscurrently playing.

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or

Fast Forward) buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttonsor for 1.5 seconds while an audio file onthe USB device is playing to reverse or fastforward the track being played. The track plays atan increased speed while reversing or fast for-warding. When the button is released, the audiofile returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-dio file on the USB device is playing to return tothe beginning of the current track. Press theSEEK/CAT button several times to skipbackward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-dio file on the USB device is playing to advanceone track. Press the SEEK/CAT buttonseveral times to skip forward several tracks. If thelast track in a folder on the USB device isskipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

LHA1280


RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while an audiofile on the USB device is playing, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

ALL RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → OFF

ALL RDM: all tracks on the USB device will beplayed randomly.

1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folderwill be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. Theindicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device isdisplayed on the screen unless no pattern isapplied.

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while an audiofile on the USB device is playing, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRACK RPT → OFF

1 TRACK RPT: the current track will be repeated.

1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be re-peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device isdisplayed on the screen unless no pattern isapplied.

TUNE/SCROLL knob:

If there are multiple folders with audio files on theUSB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob tochange folders. Turn the knob to the left to skipback a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skipahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audiofiles on the USB device, turning theTUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will re-turn to the first track on the USB device.

USB INTERFACE (models withoutNavigation System) (Type B) (if soequipped)

Connecting USB device:

The USB input jack is located in the center con-sole. Open the protective cover �1 on the USBjack, then insert the USB device into the jack.

When a compatible storage device is pluggedinto the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-age device can be played through the vehicle’saudio system.

WHA1530


Audio main operation:Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition. Then, press the CD·AUX button repeat-edly to switch to the USB device mode.

If the audio system is turned off while the USBdevice is playing, the USB device plays when theaudio system is turned back on.

If the audio system is off, pressing the CD·AUXbutton turns the audio system on and plays theUSB device.

If the audio system is on, the audio system auto-matically begins playing tracks from the USBdevice when it is plugged into the jack.

PLAY:

When the CD·AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the USB device inserted, thesystem will turn on.

If another audio source is playing and a USBmemory is inserted, press the CD·AUX buttonrepeatedly until the center display changes to theUSB device mode.

Next/Previous File and


Press and hold the or button for 1.5seconds while a USB device is playing to reverseor fast forward the track being played. The trackplays at an increased speed while reversing orfast forwarding. When the button is released, theUSB device returns to normal play speed.

Press the or button for less than 1.5seconds while the USB device is playing to returnto the beginning of the current track or to play thenext track. Press the button several times to skipforward or backwards several tracks.

Folder selection:

To change to another folder in the USB memory,turn the folder selector or choose a folder dis-played on the screen using the TUNE·SCROLLcontrol dial.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pressed while the USBmemory is played, the play pattern can be changeas follows.

Normal → 1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat →Normal

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-peated.

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-peated.

Normal: no repeat play pattern is applied.

RANDOM (RDM):

When the RDM button is pressed while a USBmemory is being played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows.

Normal → All Random → 1 Folder Random →Normal

All Random: all tracks on the USB device will beplayed randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folderwill be played randomly.

Normal: no random play pattern is applied.

BACK button:

When the BACK button is pressed, it returns tothe previous menu.


USB INTERFACE (models withNavigation System)

Connecting a device to the USB inputjackThe USB input jack is located in the center con-sole. Open the protective cover �1 on the USBjack, then insert the USB device into the jack.

When a compatible storage device is pluggedinto the jack, compatible audio and video files onthe storage device can be played through thevehicle’s audio system and center display screen.

When there are both audio and movie files in theUSB memory, the mode select screen is dis-

played. Use the touchscreen to select the pre-ferred type of file. When there is only type of file inthe USB memory, that audio or movie operationscreen is displayed and starts to play.

When you play a file with limited playing time, theconfirmation screen will be displayed beforestarting to play the file. Confirm the playing timeand select “yes” to start playing.

Audio file operation

DISC•AUX button:

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACCposition and press the DISC•AUX button toswitch to the USB input mode. If another audio

source is playing and a USB memory device isinserted, press the DISC•AUX button repeatedlyuntil the center display changes to the USBmemory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USBmemory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOLcontrol knob to restart the USB memory.

Seeking (Reverse or Fast

Forward) button:

Press and hold the side of the seekingbutton for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on theUSB device is playing to reverse the track beingplayed. Press and hold the side of theseeking button for 1.5 seconds while an audio fileon the USB device is playing to fast forward thetrack being played. The track plays at an in-creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.When the button is released, the audio file re-turns to normal play speed.

Seeking button:

Press the side of the seeking button whilean audio file on the USB device is playing toreturn to the beginning of the current track. Pressthe side of the seeking button severaltimes to skip backward several tracks.

WHA1530 LHA1378


Press the side of the seeking button whilean audio file on the USB device is playing toadvance one track. Press the side of theseeking button several times to skip forward sev-eral tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USBdevice is skipped, the first track of the next folderis played.

Folder selection:

To change to another folder in the USB memory,turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob or choose a folderdisplayed on the screen using the touchscreen.

Menu:

There are some options available during play-back. Select one of the following that are dis-played on the screen, if necessary. Refer to thefollowing information for each item.

● Movie PlaybackSwitch to the movie playback mode. Thisitem is displayed only when the USBmemory contains movie files.The shift selector must be in Park (P) withthe parking brake engaged to watch moviesfrom a USB device.

● Folder List/Track ListDisplays the folder or track list. The “MoviePlayback” key is also displayed in this listscreen and enables you to switch to themovie playback mode.

● Play ModeChoose the preferred play mode using thetouchscreen.

LHA1294


Movie file operation

Park the vehicle in a safe location for thefront seat occupants to operate the USBmemory while watching the images.

DISC-AUX button:

When the DISC-AUX button is pushed with thesystem off and the USB memory inserted, thesystem will turn on. If another audio source isplaying and the USB memory is inserted, pressthe DISC-AUX button repeatedly until the centerdisplay changes to the USB memory mode.

Operation keys:

To operate the USB memory, select the desiredkey displayed on the display screen.

● Pause:

Select the key to pause the movie file.To resume playing the movie file, usethe key.

● Play:

Select the key to start playing themovie file or resume the movie file if it hasbeen paused.

● Stop:

Select the key to stop playing themovie file.

● Next Chapter/Fast Forward:

Select the key to skip the chapter(s)of the disc forward. The chapters will ad-vance the number of times the key is se-lected. Press and hold the key to fast for-ward the chapter.

● Previous Chapter/Rewind:

Select the key to skip the chapter(s)of the disc backward. The chapters will goback the number of times the key is selected.Press and hold the key to rewind the chap-ter.

List:

Select the “List” key on the movie file operationscreen to display the file list.

LHA1379


Settings:

Select the “Settings” key to adjust the followingsettings:

● Audio File PlaybackSwitch to the audio playback mode. Thisitem is displayed only when the USBmemory contains audio files.

● Play ModeChoose between the “Normal” or “1 TrackRepeat” play modes.

● 10 Key SearchSelect the “10 Key Search” key to open thenumber entry screen. Input the number youwant to search for and the specified file orfolder will be played.

● DisplayAdjust the image quality of the screen.

● DRCDRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-matically adjusts the soundtrack volumelevel to maintain a more even sound to thespeakers.

● AudioChoose the preferred language of the audio.

● SubtitleChoose the preferred language of the sub-titles.

● Display ModeChoose between the “Normal”, “Wide”,“Cinema” or “Full” display modes.

iPod�* PLAYER OPERATIONWITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM(Type A) (if so equipped)

Connecting iPod�

To connect an iPod� to the vehicle so that theiPod� can be controlled with the audio systemcontrols and display screen, use the USB jacklocated in the center console. Open the protec-tive cover �1 on the USB jack in the centerconsole. Then connect the iPod�-specific end ofthe cable to the iPod� and the USB end of thecable to the USB jack on the vehicle. If your iPod�supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-

LHA1380 WHA1530


tery will be charged while connected to the ve-hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod� canonly be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod� from the vehicle, removethe USB end of the cable from the USB jack onthe vehicle, then remove the cable from theiPod�.

* iPod� is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

● iPod� 5th Generation version 1.2.3

● iPod� Classic - version 1.1

● iPod� Touch - version 2.1*

● iPod� Nano - 1st generation version 1.3.1

● iPod� Nano - 2nd generation version 1.1.3

● iPod� Nano - 3rd generation version 1.0.2

● iPod� Nano - 4th generation version 1.0.4

● iPod� Nano - 5th generation version 1.0.1

* Some features of this iPod� may not be fullyfunctional.

Make sure that your iPod� firmware is updated tothe version indicated above.


AUX button:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the AUX button repeatedlyuntil the iPod� mode is displayed on the screen.

If another audio source is playing and the iPod� isconnected, press the AUX button repeatedly toswitch to the iPod� mode.

If the vehicle audio system is turned off while theiPod� is playing, the iPod� will start when theVOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed.

Interface:

The interface for iPod� operation shown on thevehicle’s audio system display screen is similar tothe iPod� interface. Use the TUNE/SCROLLknob and ENTER button to navigate the menuson the screen. The iPod� MENU button on thevehicle audio system is used to move up one levelin the iPod� menus.

Depending on the iPod� model, the followingitems may be available on the menu list screen.For further information about each item, see theiPod� Owner’s Manual.

● Playlists

● Artists

● Albums

● Songs

● Podcasts

● Genres

● Composers

● Audiobooks

● ShuffleSongs

SEEK/CAT buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT buttons or toskip backward or forward one track.

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttonsor for 1.5 seconds while a track is playingto reverse or fast forward the track being played.The track plays at an increased speed whilereversing or fast forwarding. When the button isreleased, the track returns to normal play speed.

RPT button:

Press the RPT button while a track is playing tochange the play pattern as follows:

1 TRK RPT → ALL RPT → RPT OFF

1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.


ALL RPT: all songs in the current list are re-peated.

RPT OFF: no repeat play pattern is applied.

RDM button:

Press the RDM button while a track is playing tochange the play pattern as follows:

TRK SHUFFLE → ALBUM SHUFFLE →SHUFFLE OFF

TRK SHUFFLE: the tracks in the current list willbe played randomly.

ALBUM SHUFFLE: the albums in the current listwill be played randomly.

SHUFFLE OFF: no random play pattern is ap-plied.

iPod�* PLAYER OPERATIONWITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM(Type B) (if so equipped)

Connecting iPod:



Depending on the version of the iPod�, the dis-play on the iPod� shows a NISSAN or AccessoryAttached screen when the connection is com-pleted.



* iPod� and iPhone� are a trademark of AppleInc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility:

The following models are available:

● Fifth generation iPod� (Firmware version1.2.1 or later)

● First generation iPod Classic� (Firmwareversion 1.1 or later)

● Second generation iPod Classic� (Firmwareversion 2.0.3 or later)

● First generation iPod touch� (Firmware ver-sion 2.1.0 or later)

WHA1530


● Second and third generation iPod touch�(Firmware version 3.1.2 or later)

● First generation iPod nano� (Firmware ver-sion 1.3.1 or later)

● Second generation iPod nano� (Firmwareversion 1.1.3 or later)

● Third generation iPod nano� (Firmware ver-sion 1.0.2 or later)

● Fourth generation iPod nano� (Firmwareversion 1.0.4 or later)

● Fifth generation iPod nano� (Firmware ver-sion 1.0.1 or later)

The iPod touch� may not response quickly withthe system in some cases.

Make sure that the iPod� firmware is updated.

Audio main operation:

Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition. Then, press the CD·AUX or iPod�MENU button repeatedly to switch to the iPod�mode.

If the audio system is turned off while the iPod� isplaying, the iPod� plays when the audio system isturned back on.

If the audio system is off, pressing the CD·AUX oriPod� MENU button turns the audio system onand plays the iPod�.

If the audio system is on, the audio system auto-matically begins playing tracks from the iPod�when it is plugged into the jack.

iPod� MENU button:

Press the iPod� MENU button while the iPod� isconnected to show the iPod� operation menu onthe audio display. Scroll through the menu listusing the TUNE·SCROLL control dial. Press EN-TER to select a menu item. Items in the iPod�menu appear on the display in the following or-der:

● Now playing

● Playlists

● Artists

● Albums

● Songs

● Podcasts

● Genres

● Composers

● Audiobooks

● Shuffle songs

For more information about each item, see theiPod� Owner’s Manual.

Next/Previous Track and


Press the or button for 1.5 secondswhile the iPod� is playing to reverse or fast for-ward the track being played. The track plays at anincreased speed while reversing or fast forward-ing. When the button is released, the iPod� re-turns to the normal play speed.

Press the or button for less than 1.5seconds while the USB device is playing to returnto the beginning of the current track or to play thenext track. Press the button several times to skipforward or backwards several tracks.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pressed while a track isbeing played, the play pattern can be changed asfollows:

Repeat Off → 1 Track Repeat → All Repeat →Repeat Off

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-peated.

All Repeat: all songs in the current list are re-peated.


Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.

RANDOM (RDM):

When the RDM button is pressed while a track isbeing played, the play pattern can be changed asfollows:

Shuffle Off → Track Shuffle → Album Shuffle →Shuffle Off

Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list will beplayed randomly.

Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list willbe played randomly.

Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.

BACK button:

When the BACK button is pressed, it returns tothe previous menu.

iPod�* PLAYER OPERATION WITHNAVIGATION SYSTEM (if soequipped)

Connecting iPod�





* iPod� is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.

CompatibilityThe following models are compatible:

● iPod� 5th Generation (firmware version1.2.3 or later)

● iPod� Classic (firmware version 1.1.1 orlater)

● iPod� Touch (firmware version 2.0.0 orlater)*

● iPod� Nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-sion 1.3.1 or later)

● iPod� Nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-sion 1.1.3 or later)

● iPod� Nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-sion 1.1.3 or later)

WHA1530


● iPod� Nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-sion 1.0.4 or later)

● iPod� Nano - 5th generation (firmware ver-sion 1.0.1 or later)

* Some features of this iPod� may not be fullyfunctional.

Make sure that your iPod� firmware is updated tothe version indicated above.

Audio main operationPlace the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition. Press the DISC·AUX button repeatedlyto switch to the iPod� mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod�was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF controlknob will start the iPod�.

DISC·AUX button:

When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the iPod� connected, the systemwill turn on. If another audio source is playing andthe iPod� is connected, press the DISC·AUXbutton repeatedly until the center displaychanges to the iPod� mode.

LHA1397


Interface:

The interface for iPod� operation shown on thevehicle center display is similar to the iPod� in-terface. Use the touchscreen to control your fa-vorite settings.

The following items can be chosen from the menulist screen. For further information about eachitem, see the iPod� Owner’s Manual.

● Now Playing

● Playlists

● Artists

● Albums

● Songs

● Podcasts

● Genres

● Composers

● Audiobooks

● Shuffle Songs

The following keys shown on the screen are alsoavailable:

● Menu: returns to the previous screen.

● : plays/pauses the music selected.

Play mode:

While the iPod� is playing, touch the “Menu” keyto display the iPod� menu. Touch the “PlayMode” key to display the Play Mode screen andadjust the settings for Shuffle, Repeat and Audio-books. For further information about each item,see the iPod� Owner’s Manual.

Seeking button:

When the or side of the seekingbutton is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds whilethe iPod� is playing, the next track or the begin-ning of the current track on the iPod� will beplayed.

LHA1398 LHA1315


When the or side of the seekingbutton is pressed for more than 1.5 secondswhile the iPod� is playing, the iPod� will playwhile fast forwarding or rewinding. When thebutton is released, the iPod� will return to thenormal play speed.

Scrolling menus:

While navigating long lists of artists, albums orsongs in the music menu, it is possible to scrollthe list by the first letter. To activate letter index-ing, touch and hold the page up/down arrows onthe touchscreen.

To exit the scrolling by letter mode, perform one ofthe following:

● Push the ENTER switch on the steeringwheel.

● Do not touch the controls for 2 seconds.

MUSIC BOX� (if so equipped)The Music Box system can store songs from CDsbeing played. The system has a 9.3 gigabyte(GB) storage capacity.

The following CDs can be recorded in the MusicBox system:

● CDs without MP3/WMA files.

● Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (HybridCD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs.

● Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) speci-fication in CD-Extras.

● First session of multisession disc.

Extreme temperature conditions [below �4°F(�20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affectthe performance of the hard-disk.

NOTE:

If the hard drive needs to be replaced dueto a malfunction, all stored music data willbe erased.

LHA1399


Recording CDs

1. Operate the audio system to play a CD.For information on playing CDs, see “Com-pact Disc (CD) player operation” in this sec-tion.

2. Touch the “Start REC” key. REC CD ap-pears on the screen.

NOTE:

● The system starts playing and recording the1st track on the CD when the “Start REC”key is selected.

● Individual tracks from a CD cannot be se-lected to be recorded to the Music Box harddrive.

● The fast forward and rewind features aredisabled while the CD is recording.

● The recording process can be stopped atany time. All tracks that were played beforethe CD was stopped are stored.

● Individual tracks can be deleted from thehard drive after the CD is recorded.

● The system records faster than it plays.

If the title information of the track being recordedis stored either in the hard drive or in the CD, thetitle is automatically displayed on the screen. Fortitle acquisition from the hard drive, music recog-nition technology and related data are providedby Gracenote�.

To view the details of the track, touch the “Text”key on the screen. The track name and album titleare displayed on the screen.

If a track is not recorded successfully due toskipping sounds, the symbol is displayedbehind the track number.

The Music Box audio system cannot performrecording under the following conditions:

● There is not enough space in the hard drive.

● The number of albums reaches the maximumof 500.

● The number of tracks reaches the maximumof 3,000.

Automatic recording:

If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned toON, recording starts when a CD is inserted. Formore information, see “Music Box settings” in thissection.

LHA1263 LHA1282


Stopping recording:

To stop the recording, touch the “Stop REC” keyon the screen. If the CD is ejected, the audiosystem is turned off or the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position, the recording alsostops.

Playing recorded songsSelect the Music Box audio system by using oneof the following methods:

● Press the SOURCE select switch on thesteering wheel.For information, see “Steering wheel switchfor audio control” in this section.

● Press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly untilthe center display changes to the Music Boxmode.

● Give voice commands.For information, see “NISSAN Voice Recog-nition system” in this section.

Stopping playback:

The system stops playing when:

● Another mode (radio, CD, USB, Bluetooth�Audio or AUX) is selected.

● The audio system is turned off.

● The ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.

Seeking button:

Press the side of the seeking button whilea track is playing to return to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press the side of the seekingbutton while a track is playing to skip to thebeginning of the next track.

If you press and hold the side of the seek-ing button or the side of the seeking buttonfor more than approximately 1.5 seconds; thetrack will play while rewinding or fast forwarding.When the side of the seeking button orthe side of the seeking button is released,the track will return to the normal playing speed.

LHA1283


TUNE/FOLDER knob:

The TUNE/FOLDER knob skips from album toalbum unless it is playing “All Songs” from theMusic Library menu. When playing “All Songs”,the TUNE/FOLDER knob changes the track in-stead of the album. The upper right corner of thescreen indicates if the TUNE/FOLDER knob ischanging by track or album.

Music Box menu

There are some options available during play-back. Select the “Menu” key, then select one ofthe following that are displayed on the screen, ifnecessary. Refer to the following information foreach item:

● Now PlayingLists the tracks stored in the Music Boxsystem. Touch the name of the track to beginplaying that track.

● Music LibraryLists the songs in the Music Library. Trackscan be searched by Album, Artist or Genre.

LHA1284 LHA1285


● My PlaylistsDisplays the playlists stored in the system.Touch the “Edit” key next to a playlist toperform the following operations for thatplaylist:

– Add Current Song - adds the song cur-rently playing to the playlist.

– Add Songs by Album - adds songs to theplaylist by album.

– Add Songs by Artist - adds songs to theplaylist by artist.

– Edit Song Order - edits the order of thesongs in the playlist.

– Edit Name - changes the name of theplaylist.

– Delete Songs - deletes songs from theplaylist.

LHA1286 LHA1287


● Play ModeAlters the play mode of the playlist. Touchthe key of the mode you wish to apply. Themodes change the play pattern as follows:

– Normal - no play pattern is applied.

– 1 Album Repeat - the songs in the currentalbum are repeated.

– 1 Track Repeat - the current track is re-peated.

– 1 Album Random - the songs in the cur-rent album are played randomly.

– All Random - all songs are played ran-domly.

● Edit Music InformationEdits the information of the songs in theMusic Library.

– Edit Information of Current Song

– Edit Information by Album

– Update Gracenote from USB Device

– Transfer Missing Titles to USB

– Update Gracenote from HDD

The “Transfer Missing Titles to USB” and “Up-date Gracenote from HDD” options can be usedto update the titles of songs in the Music Library.Visit www.nissanusa.com/gracenote for detailedinstructions on how to update the Gracenotedatabase.

LHA1288 LHA1289


Music Box settingsTo set up the Music Box system to your preferredsettings, touch the “Menu” key during playback,then touch the “Music Box Settings” key.

● Music Box Used/Free Space:Displays the number of tracks and albumsstored on the hard drive. The percentage ofhard drive space taken up and the amount ofremaining recording time left are also shown.

● Automatic Recording:When this item is turned to ON, the MusicBox system automatically starts recordingwhen a CD is inserted.

● Delete Songs from Music Box:Delete music data stored on the hard drive.

● Recording Quality:Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.

● CDDB Version:Shows the version of CDDB (Compact DiscData Base).

LHA1290 LHA2149 LHA1292


Gracenote�

NOTE:

● The information contained in theGracenote� Database is not fully guaran-teed.

● The service of the Gracenote� Database onthe Internet may be stopped without priornotice for maintenance.

End-User License Agreement

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.

Gracenote� MusicID™ Terms of Use

This device contains software from Gracenote,Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). Thesoftware from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft-ware”) enables this application to do online discidentification and obtain music-related informa-tion, including name, artist, track, and title infor-mation (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other func-tions. You may use Gracenote Data only bymeans of the intended End-User functions of thisdevice.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers foryour own personal non-commercial use only. Youagree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit theGracenote Software or any Gracenote Data toany third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTESERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT-TED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to usethe Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio-late these restrictions. If your license terminates,you agree to cease any and all use of theGracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rightsin Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, andthe Gracenote Servers, including all ownershiprights. Under no circumstances will Gracenotebecome liable for any payment to you for anyinformation that you provide. You agree thatGracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under thisAgreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a uniqueidentifier to track queries for statistical purposes.The purpose of a randomly assigned numericidentifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID ser-vice to count queries without knowing anythingabout who you are. For more information, see the

web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy forthe Gracenote MusicID Service.

The Gracenote Software and each item ofGracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”Gracenote makes no representations or warran-ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracyof any Gracenote Data from in the GracenoteServers. Gracenote reserves the right to deletedata from the Gracenote Servers or to changedata categories for any cause that Gracenotedeems sufficient. No warranty is made that theGracenote Software or Gracenote Servers areerror-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.Gracenote is not obligated to provide you withnew enhanced or additional data types or cat-egories that Gracenote may provide in the futureand is free to discontinue its online services atany time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIESEXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT.GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE-SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOURUSE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE ORANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASEWILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY


CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM-AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOSTREVENUES.

Copyright:

Music recognition technology and related dataare provided by Gracenote�. Gracenote is theindustry standard in music recognition technol-ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-mation visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. GracenoteSoftware, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote.This product and service may practice one ormore of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend-ing. Some services supplied under license fromOpen Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarksof Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-marks of Gracenote.

BLUETOOTH� STREAMING AUDIO(if so equipped)If you have a compatible Bluetooth� audio devicethat is capable of playing audio files, the devicecan be connected to the vehicle’s audio systemso that the audio files on the device play throughthe vehicle’s speakers.

Connecting Bluetooth� audioTo connect your Bluetooth� audio device to thevehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-ment panel.

2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.

3. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.

LHA1316


4. A screen will appear asking if you are con-necting the device to use with the hands-free phone system. Select the “No” key.

5. Enter a PIN of your choice. It will be neededby your Bluetooth� audio device to com-plete the connection process. See theBluetooth� audio device’s owner’s manualfor more information.

Audio main operationTo switch to the Bluetooth� audio mode, pressthe DISC•AUX button repeatedly until theBluetooth� audio mode is displayed on thescreen.

The controls for the Bluetooth� audio are dis-played on the screen.

LHA1317 LHA1351 SAA2510


Bluetooth� audio settingsTo adjust the Bluetooth� audio settings, followthe procedure below:


2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.

3. Select the “Connected Devices” key.

4. Select the “Audio Player” key. 5. A list of the connected Bluetooth� audioplayers is displayed. Select the name of thedevice you wish to edit.

LHA1316 LHA1296 LHA1297


6. The Device Name and Device Address aredisplayed on the screen. Select the “Select”key to make this device the activeBluetooth� audio player. Select the “Edit”key to edit the details of the player, such asDevice Name. Select the “Delete” key todelete the device.

CD CARE AND CLEANING

● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend thedisc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean, softcloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circularmotion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

LHA1298 LHA0049


1. Source select and Power on switch2. Tuning switch3. Volume control switch

1. Source select and Power on switch2. Tuning switch3. Volume control switch

1. Source select and Power on switch2. Menu control switch/ENTER button3. Volume control switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

POWER on switch

With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-tion, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audiosystem on.

Type ALHA0752

Type BLHA0753

Type CLHA0754


SOURCE select switchPush the source select switch to change themode in the following sequence:

Type A Switch:PRESET BANK A → PRESET BANK B → PRE-SET BANK C → CD* → AUX* → PRESET BANKA.

* These modes are only available when compat-ible media storage is inserted into the device.

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,

B or C), use the tuning switch or toselect one of the preset radio stations (1 – 6).

Type B Switch:AM → FM* → XM* (satellite radio, if so equipped)→ CD** → USB/iPod** → AUX** → AM

* When using the SOURCE switch, the audiomode switches to the FM preset bank (FM1 orFM2) or XM preset bank (XM1 or XM2) that waslast active. To switch between the FM1 and FM2preset banks or the XM1 and XM2 preset banks,use the controls on the audio system.

** These modes are only available when compat-ible media is connected to the system.

Type C Switch:AM → FM1 → FM2 → XM1 → XM2 → XM3(satellite radio, if so equipped) → CD/DVD*→Music Box** → USB/iPod�* → Bluetooth� Au-dio* → AUX* → AM.

* These modes are only available when compat-ible media storage is inserted into the device.

** This mode is only available when music hasbeen downloaded into the Music Box system.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch to increase ordecrease the volume.

Tuning (Type A andType B switches only)

Memory change (radio):

While in one of the preset radio station banks,

push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to change to the next presetstation in memory.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previousradio station.

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

Menu controlswitch/ENTER button(Type C switch only)

While the display is showing a map or audioscreen, tilt the Menu Control switch upward ordownward to select a station, track, CD or folder.For most audio sources, tilting the switchup/down for more than 1.5 seconds provides adifferent function than a tilting up/down for lessthan 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM:

● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds toincrease or decrease the preset station.

● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds toseek up or down to the next station.

● Press the ENTER button to show the list ofpreset stations.


XM (if so equipped):

● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds toincrease or decrease the preset station.

● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds togo to the next or previous category.

● Press the ENTER button to show the XMMenu.

iPod�:

● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds toincrease or decrease the track number.

● Press the ENTER button to show the iPodMenu.

CD:


● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds toincrease or decrease the folder number (ifplaying compressed audio files).

● Press the ENTER button to show the CDMenu.

DVD:


● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds toincrease or decrease the title number.

● Press the ENTER button to select an itemfrom the DVD display.

● When the transparent operation menu ap-pears, the switch will control the menu.

USB:


● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds toincrease or decrease the folder number.

● Press the ENTER button to show the USBMenu.

Music Box:


● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds toincrease or decrease the album (folder)number (if playing compressed audio files).

● Press the ENTER button to show the MusicBox Menu.

Bluetooth� Audio:


AUX:

● Press the ENTER button to show the AUXMenu.

ANTENNA

Window antennaThe antenna pattern is printed inside the rearwindow.

CAUTION

● Do not place metalized film near therear window glass or attach any metalparts to it. This may cause poor recep-tion or noise.

● When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window antenna.Lightly wipe along the antenna with adampened soft cloth.


When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingprecautions; otherwise, the new equipment mayadversely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedfor any purpose while driving so fullattention may be given to vehicle op-eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit theuse of cellular telephones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If you are unable to devote full attentionto vehicle operation while talking onthe phone, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.


CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,use a phone after starting the engine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH� HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)


Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-patible Bluetooth� enabled cellular phone, youcan set up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With Bluetooth� wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connectingprocedure is required. Your phone is automaticallyconnected with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position withthe previously connected cellular phone turned onand carried in the vehicle.

You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth�cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

Before using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acompatible cellular phone and the in-vehiclephone module before using the hands-freephone system.

● Some Bluetooth� enabled cellular phones maynot be recognized by the in-vehicle phone mod-ule. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetoothfor a recommended phone list and connectinginstructions.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive a cellular signal; suchas in a tunnel, in an underground parkinggarage, near a tall building or in a moun-tainous area.

WHA1042


– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not idealor ambient sound is too loud, it may bedifficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-ing a call.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connectiondisruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected throughthe Bluetooth� wireless connection, the bat-tery power of the cellular phone may dis-charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System cannot chargecellular phones.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to bemalfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”in this section. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers. Stor-ing the device in a different location mayreduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manualregarding the telephone charges, cellularphone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only thesupplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,modification, or attachments could damagethe transmitter and may violate FCC regula-tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,including interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.and licensed toVisteon.

USING THE SYSTEMThe NISSAN Voice Recognition system allowshands-free operation of the Bluetooth� PhoneSystem.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands maynot be available so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

InitializationWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. If the button ispressed before the initialization completes, thesystem will announce “Hands-free phone systemnot ready” and will not react to voice commands.


Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSANVoice Recognition system, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminatesurrounding noises (traffic noises, vibrationsounds, etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing voice commands correctly.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking acommand. Otherwise, the command will notbe received properly.

● Start speaking a command within 5 secondsafter the tone sounds.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.

Giving voice commandsTo operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, pressand release the button located on thesteering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak acommand.

The command given is picked up by the micro-phone, and voice feedback is given when thecommand is accepted.

● If you need to hear the available commandsfor the current menu again, say “Help” andthe system will repeat them.

● If a command is not recognized, the systemannounces, “Command not recognized.Please try again.” Repeat the command in aclear voice.

● If you want to go back to the previous com-mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-tion” any time the system is waiting for aresponse.

● You can cancel a command when the sys-tem is waiting for a response by saying,“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You canalso press and hold the button on thesteering wheel for 5 seconds at any time toend the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-sion is cancelled, a double beep is played toindicate you have exited the system.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voicefeedback, press the volume control switches(+ or -) on the steering wheel while beingprovided with feedback. You can also usethe radio volume control knob.

● In most cases you can interrupt the voicefeedback to speak the next command bypressing the button on the steeringwheel.

● To use the system faster, you may speak thesecond level commands with the main menucommand on the main menu. For example,press the button and after the tonesay, “Call Redial.”

NOTE:

The combined command of Call and (aName) cannot be used.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certainway to speak numbers in voice commands. Referto the following rules and examples.

● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two ohoh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two ohoh”

● Words can be used for the first 4 digitsplaces only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two ohoh”,


– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixtytwo hundred,” and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty twohundred”

● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.The system will prompt you to continue en-tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six two zero zero”

● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-able when using the “Special Number” com-mand and the “Send” command during acall).

See “List of voice commands” and “Specialnumber” in this section for more information.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two starone two three”

● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when usingthe “Special Number” command).

● Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (availableonly when storing a phone book number).

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers assingle digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at anytime. Please use the “Help” command to getinformation on how to use the system.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steeringwheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiatea VR session or answer an incom-ing call.

LHA0757


You can also use the buttonto interrupt the system feedbackand give a command at once. See“List of voice commands” and“During a call” in this section formore information.

PHONE/ENDWhile the voice recognition sys-tem is active, press and holdthe button for 5 seconds toquit the voice recognition systemat any time.TUNING SWITCHWhile using the voice recognitionsystem, tilt the tuning switch up ordown to manually control thephone system.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you getstarted using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-ditional command options, refer to “List of voicecommands” in this section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the Bluetooth� Hands-FreePhone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter the voiceadaptation mode or press the PHONE/END( ) button to select a different lan-guage.”

3. Press the button.

For information on voice adaptation, see“Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in this sec-tion.

4. The system announces the current languageand gives you the option to change the lan-guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (inFrench). To select the current language,press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button. Toselect a different language, tilt the tuning

switch ( or ) up or down.

NOTE:

You must press the button within 5seconds to change the language.

5. If you decide not to change the language, donot press either button. After 5 seconds, theVR session will end, and the language willnot be changed.

Connecting procedure

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-formed when the vehicle is stationary. If thevehicle starts moving during the procedure,the procedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

“Connect phone” �A

“Add phone” �B

Initiate from handset �C

Name phone �D

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. The system announces the availablecommands.

2. Say: “Connect phone” �A . The system ac-knowledges the command and announcesthe next set of available commands.


3. Say: “Add phone” �B . The system acknowl-edges the command and asks you to initiateconnecting from the phone handset �C .

The connecting procedure of the cellularphone varies according to each cellularphone model. See the cellular phone Own-er’s Manual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-tions on connecting NISSAN recommendedcellular phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN andcannot be changed.

4. The system asks you to say a name for thephone �D .

If the name is too long or too short, thesystem tells you, then prompts you for aname again.

Also, if more than one phone is connectedand the name sounds too much like a namealready used, the system tells you, thenprompts you for a name again.

Making a call by entering a phonenumber

Main Menu

“Call” �A

“Phone Number” �B

Speak the digits �C

“Dial” �D

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” �A . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

3. Say “Phone Number” �B . The system ac-knowledges the command and announcesthe next set of available commands.

Say: “Special Number” to dial more than 10digits or any special characters.

4. Say the number you wish to call starting withthe area code in single digit format �C . If thesystem has trouble recognizing the correctphone number, try entering the number inthe following groups: 3-digit area code,3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “fivefive five” as the 1st group, then “one twoone” as the 2nd group, and “three three five

four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than10 digits or any special characters, say“Special Number”. See “How to say num-bers” in this section for more information.

5. When you have finished speaking the phonenumber, the system repeats it back and an-nounces the available commands.

6. Say: “Dial” �D . The system acknowledgesthe command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press thebutton on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when youhear the ring tone, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” later in this section.


LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Call”

“Phonebook”

“Recent Calls”

“Connect Phone”

When you press and release the button onthe steering wheel, you can choose from thecommands on the Main Menu. The followingpages describe these commands and the com-mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone beforespeaking.

After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hearthe list of commands currently available any timethe system is waiting for a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it,you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time thesystem is waiting for a response. The system willend the VR session. Whenever the VR session iscancelled, a double beep is played to indicateyou have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any timethe system is waiting for a response.

“Call”

Main Menu

“Call”

(Speak name) �A

“Phone Number”

(Speak Digits) �B

“Special Number” �C

“Redial” �D

“Call Back” �E

(Speak name) �A

If you have stored entries in the phonebook, youcan dial a number associated with a name andlocation.

See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how tostore entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe phone book entry you wish to call. The systemacknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with thename, the system asks you to choose the loca-tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,the system begins the call.

(Speak Digits) �B

When prompted by the system, say the numberyou wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”and “Making a call by entering a phone number”in this section for more details.

“Special Number” �C

For dialing more than 10 digits or any specialcharacters, say “Special Number”. When thesystem acknowledges the command, the systemwill prompt you to speak the number.

“Redial” �D

Use the Redial command to call the last numberthat was dialed.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to redial” andends the VR session.

“Call Back” �E

Use the Call Back command to dial the number ofthe last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.


If a call back number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to call back”andends the VR session.

During a call

During a call there are several command optionsavailable. Press the button on the steeringwheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-mands.

● “Help” — The system announces the avail-able commands.

● “Go back/Correction” — The system an-nounces “Go back,” ends the VR sessionand returns to the call.

● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returnsto the call.

● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Sendcommand to enter numbers, “*” or “#” duringa call. For example, if you were directed todial an extension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the commandand sends the tones associated with thenumbers. The system then ends the VR ses-sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,Say “pound” for “#”.

● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System to the cellularphone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Calltransferred to privacy mode.” The systemthen ends the VR session.

To reconnect the call from the cellular phoneto the Bluetooth� Hands-Free System,press the button.

● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to muteyour voice so the other party cannot hear it.Use the mute command again to unmuteyour voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phonenetwork connection is lost while the Mutefeature is on, the Mute feature will be resetto “off” for the next call so the other partycan hear your voice.

“Phonebook” (phones withoutautomatic phonebook downloadfunction)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

“Transfer Entry” �A

“Delete Entry” �B

“List Names” �C

For phones that do not support automatic down-load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth� pro-file), the “Phonebook”command is used to manu-ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.

The phonebook stores up to 40 names for eachphone connected to the system.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-book if you are currently connected withPhone B.


“Transfer Entry” �A

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a newname in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name youwould like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”If the name is too long or too short, the systemtells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a namealready stored, the system tells you, then promptsyou for a name again.

The system will ask you to transfer a phonenumber stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”See “How to say numbers” in this section formore information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phonenumber will be transferred from the cellularphone via the Bluetooth� communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers or transferring an entry, choose“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber.

“Delete Entry” �B

Use the Delete Entry command to erase oneentry from the phonebook. After the system rec-ognizes the command, speak the name to deleteor say “List Names” to choose an entry.

“List Names” �C

Use the List Names command to hear all thenames in the phonebook.

The system recites the phonebook entries butdoes not include the actual phone numbers.When the playback of the list is complete, thesystem goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any timeby pressing the button on the steeringwheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Phonebook” (phones with automaticphonebook download function)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

Speak a Name

“List Names” �A

“Record Name” �B

For phones that support automatic download of thephonebook (PBAP Bluetooth� profile), the “Phone-book” command is used to manage entries in thevehicle phonebook. You can say the name of anentry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry.

The phonebook stores up to 1000 names foreach phone connected to the system.

When a phone is connected to the system, thephonebook is automatically downloaded to thevehicle. This feature allows you to access yourphonebook from the Bluetooth� system and callcontacts by name. You can record a customvoice tag for contact names that the system hasdifficulty recognizing. For more information see“Record name” in this section.


NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-book if you are currently connected withPhone B.

“List Names” �A

Use the List Names command to hear all thenames and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries butdoes not include the actual phone numbers.When the playback of the list is complete, thesystem goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any timeby pressing the button on the steeringwheel. The system ends the VR session. See the“Record name” command in this section for infor-mation about recording custom voice tags for listentries that the system has difficulty pronounc-ing.

“Record Name” �B

The system allows you to record custom voicetags for contact names in the phonebook that thevehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature canalso be used to record voice tags to directly dialan entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voicetags can be recorded to the system.

“Recent Calls”

Main Menu

“Recent Calls”

“Outgoing” �A

“Incoming” �B

“Missed” �C

Use the Recent Calls command to access out-going, incoming or missed calls.

“Outgoing” �A

Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoingcalls made from the vehicle.

“Incoming” �B

Use the Incoming command to list the incomingcalls made to the vehicle.

“Missed” �C

Use the Missed command to list the calls made tothe vehicle that were not answered.

“Connect Phone”

NOTE:

The Add Phone command is not availablewhen the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Connect Phone”

“Add Phone” �A

“Select Phone” �B

“Delete Phone” �C

“Turn Bluetooth OFF” �D

Use the Connect Phone commands to managethe phones connecting to the vehicle or to enablethe Bluetooth� function on the vehicle.

“Add Phone” �A

Use the Add Phone command to add a phone tothe vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” in thissection for more information.

“Select Phone” �B

Use the Select Phone command to select from alist of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-tem will list the names assigned to each phoneand then prompt you for the phone you wish toselect. Only one phone can be active at a time.


“Delete Phone” �C

Use the Delete Phone command to delete aphone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-tem will list the names assigned to each phoneand then prompt you for the phone you wish todelete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will alsodelete that phonebook for that phone.

“Turn Bluetooth OFF” �D

Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to preventa wireless connection to your phone.

VOICE ADAPTATION (VA) MODE

Voice Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialectusers to train the system to improve recognitionaccuracy. By repeating a number of commands,the users can create a voice model of their ownvoice that is stored in the system. The system iscapable of storing a different voice adaptationmodel for each connected phone.

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quietoutdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-sion in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter the voiceadaptation mode or press the PHONE/END( ) button to select a different lan-guage.”

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different lan-guage, see “Choosing a language” in thissection.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selectedautomatically. If both memory locations arealready in use, the system will prompt you tooverwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you areready to begin, press the button.

8. The VA mode will be explained. Follow theinstructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tellyou an adequate number of phrases havebeen recorded.

10. The system will announce that voice adap-tation has been completed and the system isready.

The VA mode will stop if:

● The button is pressed for more than 5seconds in VA mode.

● The vehicle begins moving during VA mode.

● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF orLOCK position.

Training phrases

During the VA mode, the system instructs thetrainer to say the following phrases. (The systemwill prompt you for each phrase.)

● phonebook transfer entry

● dial three oh four two nine

● delete call back number

● incoming

● transfer entry

● eight pause nine three two pause seven

● delete all entries

● call seven two four zero nine

● phonebook delete entry


● next entry

● dial star two one seven oh

● yes

● no

● select

● missed

● dial eight five six nine two

● Bluetooth on

● outgoing

● call three one nine oh two

● nine seven pause pause three oh eight

● cancel

● call back number

● call star two zero nine five

● delete phone

● dial eight three zero five one

● record name

● four three pause two nine pause zero

● delete redial number

● phonebook list names

● call eight oh five four one

● correction

● connect phone

● dial seven four oh one eight

● previous entry

● delete

● dial nine seven two six six

● call seven six three oh one

● go back

● call five six two eight zero

● dial six six four three seven

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the voice recognition system, it ispossible to select menu options by using thesteering wheel controls instead of speaking voicecommands. The manual control mode does notallow dialing a phone number by digits. The usermay select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition,exit the manual control mode by pressing andholding the PHONE/END ( ) button. At thattime, pressing the PHONE/SEND ( ) buttonwill start the Hands Free Phone System.

Operating tips● To enter manual control mode, start the

voice recognition system and tilt the tuning( ) switch up or down. The system willspeak �Showing Manual Options� whenmanual controls are initially activated.

● To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning( ) switch up or down. The system willalways speak the current menu option. De-pending on the audio display, it will alsoshow the current menu option.

● To select the current menu option, press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button.

● To go back to the previous menu, press thePHONE/END ( ) button. If the currentmenu is the Main Menu, pressing thePHONE/END ( ) button will exit thePhone system.

● To exit the manual control mode, press andhold the PHONE/END ( ) button for 5seconds.


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, tryeach solution in turn, starting with number 1, untilthe problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is toonoisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from thephone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed byusing the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.


WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.


CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-patible Bluetooth� enabled cellular phone, youcan set up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With Bluetooth� wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to thein-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-necting procedure is required. Your phone isautomatically connected with the in-vehicle

WHA1501

BLUETOOTH� HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM(if so equipped)


phone module when the ignition switch is placedin the ON position with the connected cellularphone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth�cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports thephone commands, so dialing a phone numberusing your voice is possible. For more details, see“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this sec-tion.

Before using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acellular phone and the in-vehicle phonemodule before using the hands-free phonesystem.

● Some Bluetooth� enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and connecting.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive cellular signal; such asin a tunnel, in an underground parkinggarage, near a tall building or in a moun-tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not idealor ambient sound is too loud, it may bedifficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-ing a call.

● Immediately after the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position, it may be impos-sible to receive a call for a short period oftime.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connectiondisruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected throughthe Bluetooth� wireless connection, the bat-tery power of the cellular phone may dis-charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System cannot chargecellular phones.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to bemalfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”in this section. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers. Stor-ing the device in a different location mayreduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manualregarding the telephone charges, cellularphone antenna and body, etc.

● The signal strength display on the monitorwill not coincide with the signal strengthdisplay of some cellular phones.

● If reception between callers is unclear, ad-justing the incoming or outgoing call volumemay improve the clarity. See “Call volume” inthis section.


REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only thesupplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,modification, or attachments could damagethe transmitter and may violate FCC regula-tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,including interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.and licensed toClarion.

VOICE COMMANDSYou can use voice commands to operate variousBluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System featuresusing the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. Formore details, see “NISSAN Voice RecognitionSystem” in this section.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel and select the “Bluetooth” keyon the display.

LHA1236


2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key. 3. A popup box will appear on the screen,prompting you to confirm that the connec-tion is for the phone system. Select the “Yes”key.

4. When a PIN code appears on the screen,operate the Bluetooth� cellular phone toenter the PIN code.

The connecting procedure of the cellularphone varies according to each cellularphone. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call theNISSAN Consumer Affairs Department forinstructions on connecting recommendedcellular phones.

When the connecting is complete, thescreen will return to the Bluetooth� settingsscreen.

LHA1316 LHA1317 LHA1318


VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

This vehicle has two phonebooks available foryour use. Depending on your phone, the systemmay automatically download your entire cellphone’s phonebook into the “Handset Phone-book”. For the details on downloading yourphonebook, see “Handset phonebook” in thissection. If your phonebook does not automati-cally download, you may set up the vehiclephonebook for up to 40 entries. This phonebookallows you to record a name to speak while usingvoice recognition.

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

2. Select the “Vehicle Phonebook” key

3. Select the “Add New” key at the top of thescreen.

4. Choose the method for entering the phone-book entry. For this example, select “EnterNumber by Keypad”.

5. Enter the digits and select the “OK” key. Formore information, see “How to use the touchscreen” in this section.

6. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a nameto speak when using the Voice Recognitionsystem.

7. Select the “Store” key and prepare to speakthe name after the tone.

8. When the voicetag is successfully saved( ), select the “OK” key to save thephonebook entry.

9. After the phonebook entry is saved, it willshow a screen that is ready to call the num-ber. Select the “Back” key to return to theVehicle Phonebook.

LHA1320 LHA1321 LHA1381


● Copy from Call HistoryThe system will show a list of your incoming,outgoing or missed calls that were down-loaded from your cell phone (depending onyour phone’s compatibility). You may selectone of these entries to save in the vehiclephonebook.

● Copy from the HandsetThe system will show your cell phone’sphonebook that was downloaded (depend-ing on your phone’s compatibility). You mayselect one of these entries to save in thevehicle phonebook.

● Editing the Vehicle Phonebook

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

2. Select the “Vehicle Phonebook” key.

3. Select the desired entry from the displayedlist.

4. Select the “Edit” key.

5. Select the desired item to change.

The following editing items are available:

● Entry #Changes the displayed number of the se-lected entry.

● NameEdit the name of the entry using the keypaddisplayed on the screen.

● NumberEdit the phone number using the keypaddisplayed on the screen.

● TypeSelect the icon from the icon list.

LHA1382 LHA1383


● VoicetagConfirm and store the voicetag. Voicetagsallow easy dialing using the NISSAN VoiceRecognition system. For more information,see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” inthis section.

To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key at step3.

HANDSET PHONEBOOKMany phones will support an automatic down-load of the cellular phone’s phonebook. Sincethis method allows for up to 1000 numbers to bestored and entries are automatically assignedvoice tags by the system, this is a useful functionfor easy dialing supported by the Voice Recogni-tion system.

Transferring the handset phonebook

If your cellular phone supports automatic down-loading, the system transfers the handset phone-book automatically by default. To ensure that thisfeature is activated, press the SETTING buttonon the instrument panel and select the “Phone”key. The “Auto Downloaded” selection shouldhave the amber indicator next to the word ONactivated. Select the “Auto Downloaded” key totoggle this feature on or off.

To transfer the handset phonebook to the vehiclemanually, follow these steps:


2. Select the “Phone” key.

3. Select the “Download Handset Phonebook”key.

Once the handset phonebook is transferred tothe vehicle, it can be accessed by pressingthe button on the steering wheel, thenselecting the “Handset Phonebook” key.

Whether the handset phonebook is transferredmanually or automatically, the process can takeup to five minutes to complete, depending on thesize of the handset phonebook. See the cellularphone’s owner’s manual for more details.

LHA1319


MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. The “Phone” screen will appear onthe display.

2. Select one of the following options to make acall:

● Vehicle Phonebook: Select the name froman entry stored in the vehicle phonebook.

● Handset Phonebook: Select the name froman entry stored in the handset phonebook.

● Call History: Select the name from the in-coming or outgoing call history.

● Dial Number: Input the phone number manu-ally using a keypad displayed on the screen.For information on how to use the touch-screen, see “How to use the touch screen”in this section.

3. For all of the methods listed in Step 2 except“Dial Number”, dialing commences when thelisted name is selected. Dialing commenceswhen “OK” is selected if the number is input-ted manually. The screen changes to the“Call in Progress” screen.

4. After the call is over, perform one of thefollowing to finish the call:

a. Select the “Hang up” key on the Call inProgress screen.

b. Press the switch on the steeringwheel.

RECEIVING A CALL

When you hear a phone ring, the display willchange to phone mode. To receive a call, followone of the procedures listed below.

a. Select the “Answer” key on the display.

b. Press the phone button on the steeringwheel switches.

There are some options available when receivinga call. Select one of the following displayed onthe screen.

Answer:Accept an incoming call to talk.

LHA1322 LHA1323


Hold Call:Put an incoming call on hold.

Reject Call:Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, follow one of the procedureslisted below:

a. Select the “Reject Call” key on the display.

b. Press and hold the phone button on thesteering wheel switches.

DURING A CALL

There are some options available during a call.Select one of the following displayed on thescreen, if necessary:

Hang up:Finish the call.

Use Handset:Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

Mute:Mute your voice to the person.

Keypad:Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed.For example, entering your PIN number for voice-mail.

NOTE:

Pushing the TALK switch on thesteering wheel during a call allows num-bers and digits to be sent using Voice Rec-ognition.

Cancel Mute:This will appear after the “Mute” key is selected.Mute will be cancelled.

Switch Call:Select “Switch Call” to answer another incomingcall. By selecting “Hang Up,” you can end a calland can speak to a caller who is on hold again.

● This function may not be useable, depend-ing on the model of phone.

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder orquieter, press the volume control switch locatedon the steering wheel switches or turn the volumecontrol knob on the instrument panel while talkingon the phone. This adjustment is also available inthe SETTING mode.

LHA2074


ENDING A CALLTo finish the call, perform one of the followingprocedures:

● Select the “Hang up” key on the “Call inProgress” display.

● Push the switch on the steeringwheel.

PHONE SETTINGS

To set up the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem to your preferred settings, press the SET-TING button on the instrument panel and selectthe “Phone” key on the display.

Edit Vehicle Phonebook:See “Vehicle Phonebook” in this section for add-ing, editing and deleting contacts in the vehiclephonebook.

Delete Phonebook:Delete a phonebook stored on the system.

Download Handset Phonebook:See “Handset Phonebook” in this section foradding, editing and deleting contacts in thehandset phonebook.

LHA1324 LHA1319


Volume & Ringtone:Adjust the volume level of the ringtone, incomingcall sound and outgoing call sound. When the“Automatic Hold” option is turned on, an incom-ing call will be placed on hold automatically afterseveral rings. When the “Vehicle Ringtone” op-tion is turned on, a specific ringtone that is differ-ent from the cellular phone’s will sound whenreceiving a call.

Auto Downloaded:See “Handset Phonebook” in this section forinformation about automatically downloading thehandset phonebook.

BLUETOOTH SETTINGS

To set up the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem to your preferred settings, press the SET-TING button on the instrument panel and selectthe “Bluetooth” key on the display.

Bluetooth:Turn the Bluetooth� system on or off.

Connect Bluetooth:See “Connecting procedure” in this section formore information about connecting a phone.

Connected Devices:Display a list of the Bluetooth� devices con-nected to the system.

Edit Bluetooth Info:Check information about the device name, deviceaddress and device PIN.

Replace Connected Phone:Replace the phone currently connected to thesystem. This option allows you to keep any voic-etags that were recorded using the previousphone.

LHA1325 LHA1316


CALL VOLUMEAdjusting the incoming or outgoing call volumemay improve clarity if reception between callers isunclear.

● Incoming call — adjusting this setting allowsyou to hear a difference in volume.

● Outgoing call — adjusting this setting allowsthe person you are talking with to hear adifference in volume.

To access the settings, press the SETTING but-ton, then select “Volume & Beeps”.

You can also adjust the volume of an incomingvoice during a call by pushing the volume controlswitch on the steering wheel or by turning thevolume control knob on the instrument panel.

NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-freeoperation of the systems equipped on this ve-hicle, such as phone and vehicle information.

There are two voice recognition modes of opera-tion available. They are:

● Standard Mode

● Alternate Command Mode

In Standard Mode (the factory default setting),commands that are available are always shownon the display and announced by the system. Youcan complete your desired operation by simplyfollowing the prompts given by the system. Not allNISSAN Voice Recognition options are availablewhile in Standard Mode.

For advanced operation, you can change to anAlternate Command Mode that enables the op-eration of the display, audio, and climate controlthrough NISSAN Voice Recognition. When thismode is active, an expanded list of commandscan be spoken after pushing the TALKswitch on the steering wheel, and the voice com-mand menu prompts are turned off.

In Alternate Command Mode the recognitionsuccess rate may be affected because the num-ber of available commands and the ways ofspeaking each command are increased. See“NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com-mand Mode” in this section.

LHA1253

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)


To improve the recognition success rate whenAlternate Command Mode is active, try using theSpeaker Adaptation Function available in thatmode. See “Speaker Adaptation Function” in thissection. Otherwise, it is recommended that Alter-nate Command Mode be turned off and StandardMode be used for the best recognition perfor-mance.

While using the NISSAN Voice Recognition sys-tem for certain Phone and Navigation features,you can switch to using manual controls (touch-screen, steering wheel controls) and the informa-tion you have already entered by voice control willbe retained. To switch to manual controls, selectthe “Manual Controls” key on the display when itappears. The system will respond by speaking“Changing to manual operation. Please usemanual controls to continue.”

For the voice commands for the navigation sys-tem, refer to the Navigation System Owner’sManual of your vehicle.

For vehicles in the U.S., the factory default settingis the Standard Mode. See “NISSAN Voice Rec-ognition Standard Mode” in this section. For ve-hicles in Canada, the factory default setting is theAlternate Command Mode. See “NISSAN VoiceRecognition Alternate Command Mode” in thissection.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITIONSTANDARD MODEThe Standard Mode enables control of naviga-tion, phone and vehicle information. With thissetting active, commands that are available arealways shown on the display and announced bythe system.

Displaying user guideIf you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition systemfor the first time or you do not know how tooperate it, you can display the User Guide forconfirmation.

You can confirm how to use voice commands byaccessing a simplified User Guide, which con-tains basic instructions and tutorials for severalvoice commands.

1. Press the INFO button on the instrumentpanel.

2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

NOTE:

You can skip steps 1 and 2 by pressingthe switch and saying “Help”.

3. Select the “User Guide” key.

4. Select an item.

LHA1326


Available items:

● Getting Started

Describes the basics of how to operate theVoice Recognition system.

● Let’s Practice

Initiates a practice session that demon-strates how to improve voice recognition bythe system.

● Using the Address Book

Tutorial for using the Address Book

● Finding a Street Address

Tutorial for entering a destination by streetaddress.

● Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voicecommand operation.

● Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips of speaking for correctcommand recognition by the system.

Getting startedBefore using the Voice Recognition system forthe first time, you can confirm how to use com-mands by viewing the Getting Started section ofthe User Guide.

1. Select the “Getting Started” key.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling thescreen.

Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec-ognition system

If you choose “Finding a Street Address”, “Usingthe Address Book” or “Placing Calls”, you canview tutorials on how to perform these operationsusing Voice Recognition.

LHA1329


Let’s PracticeThe system is equipped with a tutorial that allowsyou to practice saying commands and receivefeedback on the volume, speed and timing of yourspeech.

To initiate a practice session, access the UserGuide and select the “Let’s Practice” key. Followthe on-screen prompts until the session is com-plete. After the session is completed, a screenwill be displayed that shows an analysis of differ-ent elements of your speech. Select the “TryAgain” to repeat the session if improvement isneeded. Select the “Done” key to return to theUser Guide screen.

Useful tips for correct operationYou can display useful speaking tips to help thesystem recognize your voice commands cor-rectly.

1. Select “Help on Speaking”.


LHA1327 LHA1328 LHA1330


Voice recognition settingsThe available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec-ognition system are described.

1. Select “Voice Recognition”.


USING THE SYSTEMInitializationWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. When completed,the system is ready to accept voice commands. Ifthe switch is pressed before the initializa-tion completes, voice commands will not be ac-cepted. Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec-ognition initialization is completed.

BEFORE STARTINGTo get the best recognition performance fromVoice Recognition, observe the following:

● The interior of the vehicle should be as quietas possible. Close the windows to eliminatethe surrounding noises (traffic noise and vi-bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent thesystem from correctly recognizing the voicecommands.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking acommand.

● Speak in a natural conversational voice with-out pausing between words.

● If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fanspeed is automatically lowered so that yourcommands can be recognized more easily.

GIVING VOICE COMMANDS

1. Press the switch located on the steer-ing wheel.

LHA1331 LHA0768


2. A list of commands appears on the screen,and the system announces, “Would you liketo access Phone, Navigation, Information,Audio or Help?”

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on thescreen changes from to , speaka command.

4. Continue to follow the voice menu promptsand speak after the tone sounds until yourdesired operation is completed.

Operating tips● Say a command after the tone. Voice com-

mands cannot be accepted when the iconis .

● Commands that are available are alwaysshown on the display and spoken throughvoice menu prompts. Commands other thanthose that are displayed are not accepted.Please follow the prompts given by the system.

● If the command is not recognized, the sys-tem repeats the announcement. Repeat thecommand in a clear voice.

● Press the switch on the steeringwheel to return to the previous screen.

● If you want to cancel the command, pressand hold the switch. The message,“Voice cancelled” will be announced.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-tem feedback, push the volume controlswitch on the steering wheel or use theaudio system volume knob while the systemis making an announcement.

How to speak numbersVoice Recognition requires a certain way tospeak numbers when giving voice commands.Refer to the following examples.

General rule:● Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.

● When saying the phone number 800-662-6200,the system will accept “eight-hundred” in addi-tion to “eight zero zero” or “eight oh oh”. 500,700, and 900 are also supported.

Examples:

● 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero six six two six twozero zero”

– “One eight hundred six six two six twozero zero”

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:

You can improve the recognition of phone numbersby saying the phone number in three groups ofnumbers. For example, when you try to call 800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and the sys-tem will then ask you for the next three digits. Then,say “six six two”. After recognition, the system willthen ask for the last four digits. Say, “six two zerozero”. Using this method of phone digit entry canimprove recognition performance.

NOTE:

When speaking a house number, speak thenumber “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter“O” is included in the house number, it willnot be recognized as “0” even if you speak“oh” instead of “zero”.

LHA1333


Standard Mode command listCategory Command:

COMMAND ACTIONPhone Displays Phone function commands.Navigation Displays Navigation function commands.Information Displays Vehicle Information.Audio Displays Audio commands.Help Displays User Guide.

Phone Command:

COMMAND ACTIONDial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.

Change Number Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized (available during phone number entry).Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the vehicle phonebook.Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the handset phonebook.Call History Makes a call to a number in the incoming or outgoing call logs.International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).


Navigation Command:

COMMAND ACTIONHome Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.Address Book Searches for a location stored in the Address Book.Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

Information Command:

COMMAND ACTIONTraffic Info. Turns the traffic information system on and off.Where am I? Displays current vehicle location.

Audio Command:

COMMAND ACTIONAM Changes the audio system mode to AM radio.FM Changes the audio system mode to FM radio.XM Changes the audio system mode to satellite radio.Music Box Changes the audio system mode to Music Box.CD Changes the audio system mode to CD.


Voice command examplesSome basic voice command examples are de-scribed here.

For navigation system commands, see the sepa-rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Example 1 — Placing a call to the phonenumber 800-662-6200:


2. The system announces, “Would you like toaccess Phone, Navigation, Information, Au-dio or Help?”

3. Say “Phone”.

LHA0768 LHA1333


4. Say “Dial Number”. 5. Say “800”. 6. The system announces, “Please say the nextthree digits or dial, or say change number.”

7. Say “662”.

LHA1334 LHA1335 LHA1336


8. The system announces, “Please say the lastfour digits or say change number.”

9. Say “6200”.

10. The system announces, “Dial or ChangeNumber?”

11. Say “Dial”.

12. The system makes a call to 800-662- 6200.

NOTE:

● You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 con-tinuous digits), if the area code is not nec-essary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping isrecommended for improved recognition.See “How to speak numbers” in this section.

● You can only say a phone number using the3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits usingthis command. Please use the “InternationalCall” command for all other formats, andwhen special characters such as star (*),pound (#), and plus (+) need to be entered.

● If you say “Change Number” during phonenumber entry, the system will automaticallyrequest that you repeat the number usingthe 3-3-4 format. In this case please say thearea code first and then follow the prompts.

● Do not add a “1” in front of the area codewhen speaking phone numbers.

● If the system does not recognize your com-mand, please try repeating the commandusing a natural voice. Speaking too slowly ortoo loudly may further decrease recognitionperformance.

LHA1337 LHA1338


Example 2 — Placing an international callto the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:


2. The system announces, “Would you like toaccess Phone, Navigation, Information, Au-dio or Help?”

3. Say “Phone”.

4. Say “International Call”.LHA0768 LHA1333 LHA1334


5. Say “011811112223333”. 6. Say “Dial”.

7. The system makes a call to 011-81-111-222-3333.

NOTE:

Any digit input format is available in theInternational Number input process, aswell as the special characters such as star(*), pound (#), and plus (+).

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITIONALTERNATE COMMAND MODEThe Alternate Command Mode enables controlof the Audio, Climate Control and Display sys-tems as well as additional commands for theVehicle Information, Phone and Navigation sys-tems. With this setting active, the system doesnot announce or display the available commandsat each step.

When Alternate Command Mode is activated, anexpanded list of commands can be used afterpushing the TALK switch. Under thismode, the screen for Standard Mode commandsis not available on the display. Please review theexpanded command list, available when thismode is active, as some Standard Mode com-mands are replaced. Please see examples ofAlternate Command Mode screens.

Please note that in this mode the recognitionsuccess rate may be affected as the number ofavailable commands and ways of speaking eachcommand are increased. You can turn this modeON or OFF. When this mode is activated, theVoice Recognition Settings will change to showmore options.

LHA1339 LHA1340


Activating Alternate Command Mode1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel.

2. Select the “Others” key on the display.


4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode” key.

5. The confirmation message is displayed onthe screen. Select the “OK” key to activatethe Alternate Command Mode.

6. Alternate Command Mode is activated andthe setting menu is expanded to include theAlternate Command Mode options. See“Settings menu” in this section for an expla-nation of the options.

Displaying the command listIf you are controlling the system by voice com-mands for the first time or do not know theappropriate voice command, perform the follow-ing procedure for displaying the voice commandlist (available only in Alternate Command Mode).

Press the switch, listen for the tone andsay, “Help”. The system will respond by display-ing the command list main menu.

LHA1403 LHA1331 LHA1341


Only manual controls such as the touchscreencan navigate the command list menu.

As an alternative to the voice command “Help”,you may access the command list using the fol-lowing steps:



NOTE:

You can skip steps 1 and 2 if you say “Help”.

3. Select the “Command List” key.

4. Select a category. The command list for thecategory selected is shown.

5. If necessary, scroll the screen to view theentire list.

6. Select the “Back” key to return to the previ-ous screen.

LHA1342 LHA1402 LHA1342


Alternate Command Mode command list

Phone Command:

COMMAND ACTIONDial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact in the vehicle phonebook.Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact in the handset phonebook.International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).Call <name> Makes a call to a contact that is stored in either the Vehicle Phonebook or Handset Phonebook. Please say “Call” followed by a stored

name.Incoming Calls Shows the last 5 incoming phone calls.Outgoing Calls Shows the last 5 outgoing phone calls.Missed Calls Shows the last 5 missed phone calls.

Navigation Command:

COMMAND ACTIONHome Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.Address Book Displays the first 5 entries of the Address Book.Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.Previous Start Point Calculates a route to your previous starting point of the last route.Minimize Freeway Route Recalculates a route to the current destination while minimizing freeway usage.Fastest Route Recalculates a route to the current destination using the fastest estimated time.Shortest Route Recalculates a route to the current destination using the shortest distance.Cancel Route Cancels the current route.Delete Destination Deletes the current destination.Birdview Map Changes the Map display to Birdview.


COMMAND ACTIONPlanview Map Changes the Map display to a 2-dimensional view.North Up Changes the Map display to keep north pointing up on the screen.Heading Up Changes the Map display to keep the direction of the vehicle pointing up on the screen.Zoom In <1 to 13> Changes the map scale to a smaller number.Zoom Out <1 to 13> Changes the map scale to a larger number.Guidance Voice ON/OFF Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off.Guide Voice Repeat Repeats the last navigation voice guidance.

Information Command:

COMMAND ACTIONTraffic Information Turns the traffic information system on and off.Where am I? Displays the current vehicle location.Weather Information Displays weather information.Weather Map Displays the current weather map.

Audio Command:

COMMAND ACTIONAM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.XM Turns to the SAT band, selecting the station last played.Music Box Turns to the Music Box hard-disk drive audio system.CD Starts to play a CD.USB Turns to the USB audio input.Bluetooth Audio Turns to the Bluetooth� audio system.AUX Turns to the AUX input.


Displaying user guideYou can confirm how to use voice commands byaccessing a simplified User Guide, which con-tains basic instructions and tutorials for severalvoice commands.



3. Select the “User Guide” key.

4. Select an item.

Available items:

● Getting Started

Describes the basics of how to operate theVoice Recognition system.

● Let’s Practice

Initiates a practice session that demon-strates how to improve recognition by thesystem.

● Using the Address Book

Tutorial for using the Address Book.

● Finding a Street Address

Tutorial for Finding a Street Address.

● Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voicecommand operation.

● Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips for how to correctlyspeak commands in order for them to beproperly recognized by the system.

● Voice Recognition Settings

Describes the available Voice Recognitionsettings.

● Adapting the System to Your Voice

Tutorial for adapting the system to yourvoice.

USING THE SYSTEM

InitializationWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. When completed,the system is ready to accept voice commands. Ifthe switch is pressed before the initializa-tion completes, the display will show the mes-sage: “System not ready.” or a beep sounds.

LHA1343 LHA1344


Before startingTo get the best performance from NISSAN VoiceRecognition, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminate thesurrounding noises (traffic noises, vibrationsounds, etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing the voice commands cor-rectly.

● When the climate control is in the AUTOmode, the fan speed decreases automati-cally for easy recognition.

● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking acommand.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.

Giving voice commands

1. Press and release the switch locatedon the steering wheel.

2. A list of commands appears on the screen,and the system announces, “Please say acommand from the displayed list or say Helpto show all commands.”

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speaka command.

4. Once a command is recognized, the systemwill announce the recognized command andperform the requested action.

If the command is not recognized, the sys-tem repeats the announcement. Repeat thecommand in a clear voice after the tone.

LHA0768 LHA1345


Operating tips

● Say a command after the tone. Voice com-mands cannot be accepted when the iconis .

● If the command is not recognized, the sys-tem repeats the announcement. Repeat thecommand in a clear voice.

● Press the switch on the steeringwheel to return to the previous screen.

● If you want to cancel the command, pressand hold the switch. The message,“Voice cancelled” will be announced.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-tem feedback, push the volume controlswitch on the steering wheel or use theaudio system volume knob while the systemis making an announcement.

● To minimize the amount of prompts spokenby the system in Alternate Command Mode,use the Minimize Voice Feedback function.To access the Minimize Voice Feedbackfunction press the SETTING button, thenselect the “Others” key. Then select the“Voice Recognition” key.

How to speak numbersVoice Recognition requires a certain way tospeak numbers when giving voice commands.Refer to the following examples.

General rule:

● Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.

● When saying the phone number 800-662-6200, the system will accept “eight-hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are alsosupported.

Examples:

● 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero six six two six twozero zero”

– “One eight hundred six six two six twozero zero”

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:

You can improve the recognition of phone num-bers by saying the phone number in three groupsof numbers. For example, when you try to call800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, andthe system will then ask you for the next threedigits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,the system will then ask for the last four digits.Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method ofphone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-mance.

NOTE:

When speaking a house number, speak thenumber “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter“O” is included in the house number, it willnot be recognized as “0” even if you speak“oh” instead of “zero”.

Settings menuThe content of the Settings Menu differs whenthe system is in the Alternate Command Mode.

Command List:

Displays the command list for Alternate Com-mand Mode.


User Guide:

The user guide provides basic instructions forusing Voice Recognition and accessing somevoice commands.

NOTE:

The user guide can also be accessed fromwithin the INFO menu after pressing theINFO button.

Speaker Adaptation:

Starts a system training procedure to learn thespecific sounds of your voice. See “Speaker ad-aptation function” in this section.

Alternate Command Mode:

For advanced operation, an Alternate CommandMode is provided. This setting enables control ofthe Audio and Climate Control systems in addi-tion to additional commands for the Phone andNavigation systems. With this setting active, thesystem does not announce or display the avail-able commands at each step. When this mode isactivated, the Voice Recognition Settings willchange to show more options.

Minimize Voice Feedback:

Reduces the amount of the information spokenfor each voice instruction.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTIONThe Voice Recognition system has a function tolearn the user’s voice for better voice recognitionperformance. The system can memorize thevoices of up to three persons.

Having the system learn the user’svoice

1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-ment panel, select the “Others” key on thedisplay.


3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.

4. Select the user whose voice is to be memo-rized by the system.

LHA1341 LHA1346


5. Select a category to be learned by the sys-tem from the following list:

● Phone

● Navigation

● Information

● Audio

● Help

The voice commands in the category aredisplayed.

6. Select a voice command to train.

The Voice Recognition system starts.

7. The system requests that you repeat a com-mand after a tone. This command is alsodisplayed on the screen.

8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speakthe command that the system requested.

9. When the system has recognized the voicecommand, the voice of the user is learned.

Press the switch or select the “Back” keyto return to the previous screen.

If the system has learned the command correctly,the voice command indicator on the screen turnson.

Speaker Adaptation function settingsEdit Name:

Edit the user name using the keypad displayed onthe screen.

Reset Result:

Resets the user’s voice that the Voice Recogni-tion system has learned.

Continuous Learning:

When this item is turned to ON, you can have thesystem learn the voice commands in succession,without selecting commands one by one.

LHA1347 LHA1348 LHA1349


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, follow the solutions given in this guidefor the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number, tryeach solution in turn, starting with number one,until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message SolutionDisplays “COMMAND NOT RECOG-NIZED” or the system fails to interpretthe command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Standard Mode command list” or “Alternate Command Mode command list” in thissection.

2. Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.The system consistently selects thewrong voicetag in the phonebook.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. See “Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System with NavigationSystem” in this section.

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.


MEMO


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery discharge . . . . . . . . 5-9NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

WARNING



EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the rear vent windows, lift gates,doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)closed while driving, otherwise exhaustgases could be drawn into the passen-ger compartment. If you must drive withone of these open, follow theseprecautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial tohigh to circulate the air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the trunk lid or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:a. The vehicle is raised for service.b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and in-flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-function exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Starting and driving 5-3

Additional information:

● The TPMS does not monitor the tirepressure of the spare tire.

● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicleis driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25km/h). Also, this system may not detect asudden drop in tire pressure (for example aflat tire while driving).

● The low tire pressure warning light does notautomatically turn off when the tire pressureis adjusted. After all 4 tires are inflated to therecommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tirepressure warning light. Use a tire pressuregauge to check the tire pressure.

● The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning ap-pears in the vehicle information display whenthe low tire pressure warning light is illumi-nated and low tire pressure is detected. TheCHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning turns offwhen the low tire pressure warning lightturns off.

● The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warningdoes not appear if the low tire pressurewarning light illuminates to indicate a TPMSmalfunction.

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light to illumi-nate. If the warning light illuminates in lowambient temperature, check the tire pres-sure for all four tires.

● The Tire and Loading Information label (alsoreferred to as the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label) is located in thedriver’s door opening.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning light” in the “Instruments and controls”section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In caseof emergency” section for changing aflat tire.)


● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and theTPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarilyinterfere with the operation of the TPMS andcause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-minate.

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radiofrequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies isbeing used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or aDC/AC converter is being used in or near thevehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation. Note:Changes or modification not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s author-ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer-ence, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence, include interference that maycause undesired operation of the de-vice.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obeyall traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-neuvers, because these driving practices couldcause you to lose control of your vehicle. As withany vehicle, loss of control could result in acollision with other vehicles or objects orcause the vehicle to roll over, particularly ifthe loss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and


avoid driving when tired. Never drive when underthe influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-scription or over-the-counter drugs which maycause drowsiness). Always wear your seat beltas outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual, and also instruct your passengers to doso.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, anunbelted or improperly belted person issignificantly more likely to be injured orkilled than a person properly wearing aseat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

If the right side or left side wheels unintentionallyleave the road surface, maintain control of thevehicle by following the procedure below. Pleasenote that this procedure is only a general guide.The vehicle must be driven as appropriate basedon the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheelwith both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.

4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-hicle to follow the road while vehicle speedis reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-hicle back onto the road surface until vehiclespeed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn thesteering wheel until both tires return to theroad surface. When all tires are on the roadsurface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-propriate driving lane.

● If you decide that it is not safe to return thevehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,road or traffic conditions, gradually slow thevehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSSRapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occurif the tire is punctured or is damaged due tohitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure losscan also be caused by driving on under-inflatedtires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handlingand stability of the vehicle, especially at highwayspeeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect

the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels andtires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses airpressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintaincontrol of the vehicle by following the procedurebelow. Please note that this procedure is only ageneral guide. The vehicle must be driven asappropriate based on the conditions of the ve-hicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase thechance of losing control of the vehicle ifthere is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.Losing control of the vehicle may cause acollision and result in personal injury.

● The vehicle generally moves or pulls inthe direction of the flat tire.

● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

● Do not rapidly release the acceleratorpedal.

● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not over react.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheelwith both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.


3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe locationoff the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to graduallystop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers andeither contact a roadside emergency serviceto change the tire or see “Changing a flattire” in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if yourability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignitionswitch while driving the vehicle except inan emergency. (The engine will stop whenthe ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu-tive times in quick succession or the igni-tion switch is pushed and held for morethan 2 seconds.) If the engine stops whilethe vehicle is being driven, this could leadto a crash and serious injury.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH


When the ignition switch is pushed without de-pressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutchpedal (M/T), the ignition switch position will illu-minate as follows:

Push center

● once to change to ACC.

● two times to change to ON.

● three times to return to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically return to theLOCK position when any door is either opened orclosed with the switch in the OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignitionswitch position cannot be switched to OFF untilthe shift selector is moved to the P (Park) position(CVT) or N (Neutral) position (M/T).

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)position (CVT) or N (Neutral) position (M/T).

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switchposition will change to the ON position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFFposition.

The shift selector can be moved from the P(Park) position if the ignition switch is inthe ON position and the brake pedal isdepressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,the push-button ignition switch cannot bemoved from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation aredisplayed on the vehicle information display. See“Vehicle information display” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCHPOSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position):

The ignition switch can only be locked in thisposition.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it ispushed to the ACC position while carrying theIntelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key insertedin the port.

The ignition switch will lock when any door isopened or closed with the ignition switched off.

OFF:

The ignition switch is in the OFF position whenthe engine is turned off using the ignition switch.No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.

ACC (Accessories):

This position activates electrical accessories,such as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn theignition switch to the OFF position after 30 min-utes under the following conditions:

● all doors are closed.

● shift selector is in P (Park).

LSD2000


The battery saver feature will be cancelled if anyof the following occur:

● any door is opened.

● shift selector is moved out of the P (Park).

● ignition switch changes position.

ON (Normal operating position):

This position turns on the ignition system andelectrical accessories.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignitionswitch in ACC or ON positions when theengine is not running for an extended pe-riod. This can discharge the battery.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFFTo shut off the engine in an emergency situationwhile driving perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switchfor more than 2 seconds.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™BATTERY DISCHARGEIf the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost dis-charged, the guide light �A of the Intelligent Keyport blinks and the indicator appears on the ve-hicle information display. See “Vehicle informa-tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”section.

In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into theport �B allows you to start the engine. Make surethe Intelligent Key is placed in the correct direc-tion: The front side faces upward and the key ringside faces downward as illustrated.

To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, pushthe ignition switch to the LOCK position and pullthe Intelligent Key out of the port �C .

WSD0232 WSD0233


NOTE:

The Intelligent Key port does not chargethe Intelligent Key battery. If you see thelow battery indicator, replace the battery assoon as possible. See “Battery replace-ment” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

CAUTION

● Never place anything except the Intelli-gent Key in the Intelligent Key port. Do-ing so may cause damage to theequipment.

● Make sure the Intelligent Key is in thecorrect direction when inserting it tothe Intelligent Key port. The engine maynot start if it is in the wrong direction.

● Remove the Intelligent Key from theIntelligent Key port after the ignitionswitch is pushed to the LOCK position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position, and wait approximately 10seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluidas frequently as possible, or at least when-ever you refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe ignition switch is pushed to the ONposition. See “Warning/indicator lights andaudible reminders” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE


1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) model:

Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector is in any of the drivingpositions.

Manual transmission (M/T) model:

Move the shift selector to N (Neutral). De-press the clutch pedal to the floor.

The starter is designed not to operateunless the clutch pedal is fully de-pressed.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.Depress the brake pedal and the clutchpedal (if so equipped) and push the ignitionswitch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push andrelease the ignition switch while depressingthe brake pedal with the ignition switch inany position.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and whileholding, crank the engine. Release theaccelerator pedal when the engine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion to start cranking the engine. After 5 or6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing theignition switch to LOCK. After crankingthe engine, release the accelerator pedal.Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by depressing thebrake pedal and pushing the push-buttonignition switch to start the engine. If theengine starts, but fails to run, repeat theabove procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, push the ignition switch to theOFF position and wait 10 seconds beforecranking again, otherwise the startercould be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather. In cold weather, keep the en-gine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutesbefore shutting it off. Starting and stoppingthe engine over a short period of time maymake the vehicle more difficult to start.

5. To stop the engine, shift the shift selector tothe P (Park) position (CVT) or to N (Neutral)and apply the parking brake (M/T) and pushthe ignition switch to the OFF position.

STARTING THE ENGINE


CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT) (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), Ds (DriveSport) or (M) Manual shift mode. Al-ways depress the brake pedal untilshifting is completed. Failure to do socould cause you to lose control andhave an accident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

● Except in an emergency, do not shift tothe N (Neutral) position while driving.Doing so can cause a loss of enginebraking which may result in a collision,serious personal injury or death. In ad-dition, coasting with the transmissionin the N (Neutral) position may causeserious damage to the transmission.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brakeshould be used for this purpose.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-trolled to produce maximum power and smoothoperation.

The CVT can operate in two different automaticdrive modes:

● D (Drive) mode - Move the shift selector to D(Drive), the transmission is in the normalforward automatic driving mode. The posi-tion indicator in the meter shows a “D”. TheD (Drive) mode does not produce a gearchange sensation like a traditional automatictransmission.

WSD0247

DRIVING THE VEHICLE


● Ds (Drive Sport) mode - Move the shift se-lector over from D (Drive) to the left into themanual shift gate. The position indicator inthe meter shows a “Ds”. In Ds (Drive Sport)mode, transmission operation changes to�Sporty” driving shift operation, creating amore aggressive acceleration feeling thanthe D (Drive) mode and a gear change sen-sation when the driver accelerates quickly.When the driver selects M (Manual) moderatio with shift selector during Ds (DriveSport) mode operation, the driver must movethe shift selector from Ds mode to D modeand back again to re-select Ds (Drive Sport)mode.

● To cancel the Ds mode, return the shift se-lector to the D (Drive) position. The trans-mission returns to the automatic drive mode.

The CVT can operate in a manual drive mode:

● M (Manual) mode - With the shift selector inthe manual shift gate Ds (Drive Sport) mode,M (Manual) mode can be selected by mov-ing the shift selector up (+) or down (–). In Mmode, the transmission will produce notice-able upshifts and downshifts. The positionindicator in the meter shows a “M”.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

NOTE:

Engine power may be automatically re-duced to protect the CVT if the enginespeed increases quickly when driving onslippery roads or while being tested onsome dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shiftselector out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

4. Stop the vehicle completely before shiftingthe shift selector to the P (Park) position.

The CVT is designed so the foot brakepedal MUST be depressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) to any drive position whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift selector cannot be moved out of P(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-tions if the ignition switch is pushed to theLOCK position.

To move the shift selector:

Press the button while depressing thebrake pedal

Press the button to shift

Shift without pressing button

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector from P (Park) toany of the desired shift positions.

WSD0248


WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-tor is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

P (Park):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theP (Park) or R (Reverse) position only whenthe vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift selector position when thevehicle is parked or when starting the engine.Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.The brake pedal should be depressed tomove the shift selector from N (Neutral) orany drive position to P (Park). Apply theparking brake. When parking on a hill, apply theparking brake first, then move the shift selectorinto the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theP (Park) or R (Reverse) position only whenthe vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Makesure the vehicle is completely stopped beforeselecting the R (Reverse) position. The brakepedal must be depressed to move the shiftselector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or anydrive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

DS (Drive Sport):

When the shift selector is shifted from the D(Drive) position to the manual shift gate, thetransmission enters the DS (Drive Sport) mode.Moving the shift selector to the DS (Drive Sport)position allows you to enjoy “sporty” driving shiftoperation on a winding road and feel smoothacceleration or deceleration on a hilly road bymoving in a lower gear automatically. When can-celing the DS mode, return the shift selector tothe D (Drive) position. The transmission returns tothe normal driving mode.


Manual shift mode (if so equipped)

When the shift selector is in the Ds (Drive Sport)position, the transmission is ready for the manualshift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-ally by moving the shift selector up (+) or down(–). To cancel the Ds mode, return shift selectorto the D (Drive) position. The transmission returnsto automatic driving mode.

When the shift selector is shifted from D (Drive)to the manual shift gate �A with the vehiclestopped or while driving, the transmission entersthe manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be se-lected manually. In the manual shift mode, theshift range is displayed on the position indicator

in the meter. When shifting the shift selector tothe manual shift gate, the position indicator dis-plays 1 (first) up to 6 (sixth) depending on vehiclespeed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6

M6 (6th):

Use this position for all normal forward driving athighway speeds.

M5 (5th):

Use this position when driving up long slopes, orfor engine braking when driving down longslopes.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhillgrades.

M1 (1st):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor driving slowly through deep snow, sand ormud, or for maximum engine braking on steepdownhill grades.

● Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time in lower than 6range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up:

Move the shift selector to the + (up) side. (Shiftsto higher range.)

When shifting down:

Move the shift selector to the � (down) side.(Shifts to lower range.)

● The transmission will automatically down-shift the gears. (For example, if you select the3rd range, the transmission will shift downbetween the 3rd and 1st gears.)

● Moving the shift selector rapidly to the sameside twice will shift the ranges in succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode:

Return the shift selector to the D (Drive) positionto return the transmission to the normal drivingmode.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may not shift to the selected gear.This helps maintain driving perfor-mance and reduces the chance of ve-hicle damage or loss of control.

WSD0249


● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may shift up automatically to ahigher range than selected if the en-gine speed is too high. When the ve-hicle speed decreases, the transmis-sion automatically shifts down andshifts to 1st gear before the vehiclecomes to a stop.

● CVT operation is limited to automatic drivemode when CVT fluid temperature is ex-tremely low even if manual shift mode isselected. This is not a malfunction. WhenCVT fluid warms up, manual mode can beselected.

● When the CVT fluid temperature is high, theshift range may upshift in lower rpm thanusual. This is not a malfunction.

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, theshift selector may not be moved from the P (Park)position even with the brake pedal depressedand the shift selector button pushed.

It will be necessary to jump start or have yourbattery charged, see “Jump starting” in the “Incase of emergency” section. Contact yourNISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.

To move the shift selector, complete the followingprocedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion.


3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a 3 mmscrewdriver, remove the shift lock releasecover.

● If available, a plastic trim tool can also beused.

4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lockrelease slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)position while holding down the shift lockrelease.

If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the trans-mission as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the shift selector cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-ing stop lights could cause an accidentinjuring yourself and others.

WSD0250


Accelerator downshift— in D position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protectionmode

This transmission has a high fluid temperatureprotection mode. If the fluid temperature be-comes too high (for example, when climbingsteep grades in high temperature with heavyloads, such as when towing a trailer), enginepower and, under some conditions, vehiclespeed will be decreased automatically to reducethe chance of transmission damage. Vehiclespeed can be controlled with the acceleratorpedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may belimited.

Fail-safeIf the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. The MIL maycome on to indicate the fail-safe mode isactivated, see “Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)” in the “Instrument and controls”sec-

tion. This will occur even if all electricalcircuits are functioning properly. In thiscase, place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and wait for 10 seconds. Thenpush the switch back to the ON position.The vehicle should return to its normal op-erating condition. If it does not return to itsnormal operating condition, have aNISSAN dealer check the transmission andrepair if necessary.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protec-tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.The reduced speed may be lower thanother traffic, which could increase thechance of a collision. Be especially care-ful when driving. If necessary, pull to theside of the road at a safe place and allowthe transmission to return to normal op-eration, or have it repaired if necessary.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Do not over-rev the engine when shift-ing to a lower gear. This may cause aloss of control or engine damage.

● Do not shift to the N (Neutral) positionwhile driving. Doing so may result in anaccident due to loss of engine braking.

CAUTION

● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedalwhile driving. This may cause clutchdamage.

● Fully depress the clutch pedal beforeshifting to help prevent transmissiondamage.

● Stop your vehicle completely beforeshifting into R (Reverse).

● When the vehicle is stopped with theengine running (for example, at a stoplight), shift to N (Neutral) and releasethe clutch pedal with the foot brakeapplied.


Shifting

To change gears or when upshifting or down-shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift intothe appropriate gear, then release the clutchslowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depressthe clutch pedal before operating the shift selec-tor. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressedbefore the transmission is shifted, a gear noisemay be heard. Transmission damage may occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence accordingto vehicle speed.

To back up, lift up on the shift selector ring �1 andthen move it to the R (Reverse) position afterstopping the vehicle completely.

The shift selector ring �1 returns to its originalposition when the shift selector is moved to the N(Neutral) position.

If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), thenrelease the clutch pedal. Depress the clutchpedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).

Suggested up-shift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle speeds forshifting into a higher gear. These suggestionsrelate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.Actual upshift speeds will vary according to roadconditions, the weather and individual drivinghabits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas (lessthan 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

For QR25DE:

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)1st to 2nd 8 (24)2nd to 3rd 17 (27)3rd to 4th 25 (40)4th to 5th 36 (58)5th to 6th 51 (82)

For VQ35DE:

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)1st to 2nd 9 (14)2nd to 3rd 19 (30)3rd to 4th 26 (42)4th to 5th 31 (50)5th to 6th 37 (59)

For acceleration in high altitude areas(over 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

For QR25DE:

Gear change MPH (km/h)1st to 2nd 8 (13)2nd to 3rd 17 (27)3rd to 4th 25 (40)4th to 5th 36 (58)5th to 6th 51 (82)

For VQ35DE:

Gear change MPH (km/h)1st to 2nd 15 (24)2nd to 3rd 25 (40)3rd to 4th 40 (64)4th to 5th 45 (72)5th to 6th 50 (80)

LSD0180


Suggested maximum speed in eachgearDownshift to a lower gear if the engine is notrunning smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,use the highest gear suggested for that speed.Always observe posted speed limits, and driveaccording to the road conditions, which will en-sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the enginewhen shifting to a lower gear as it may causeengine damage or loss of vehicle control.

GEAR QR25DEMPH (km/h)

VQ35DEMPH (km/h)

1st 32 (53) 36 (58)2nd 59 (95) 58 (93)3rd 82 (133) 81 (131)4th — —5th — —6th — —

WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the shift selector in place ofthe parking brake. When parking, besure the parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

To engage: Type A, firmly depress the parkingbrake. Type B, pull the lever up �A .

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift selector in the N (Neutral)position.

CVT models:

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion.

Type ALSD0158

PARKING BRAKE


3. Type A, firmly depress the parking brakepedal and it will release. Type B, while pullingup on the parking brake lever slightly, pushthe button and lower completely �B .

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

1. CANCEL switch2. ACCEL/RES switch3. COAST/SET switch4. ON/OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control switch off and have the sys-tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control switch is turned ON whilepushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, orCANCEL switch. To properly set the cruisecontrol system, use the following proce-dures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push theON·OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light inthe instrument panel comes on.

Type BWSD0169 LSD0184

CRUISE CONTROL


To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in theinstrument panel comes on. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the setspeed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel goes out.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

● Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both theCRUISE indicator light and SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● you depress the brake or clutch pedal whilepushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COASTswitch. The preset speed is deleted frommemory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-mission), or move the shift selector to N(Neutral) (CVT).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).


CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-proper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY


WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park) forCVT models or in an appropriate gearfor manual transmission models. Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away and re-sult in an accident. Make sure the shift

selector has been pushed as far for-ward as it can go and cannot be movedwithout depressing the foot brakepedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift selector in the R (Reverse)position. When parking on an uphill grade,place the shift selector in 1st gear.

Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) models:

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: �1

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: �2

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: �3

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key.

SSD0488

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS


The power assisted steering uses a hydraulicpump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, especiallyin sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will beharder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at 2 wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Parking brake break-inBreak-in the parking brake shoes whenever thestopping effect of the parking brake is weakenedor whenever the parking brake shoes and/ordrum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure thebest brake performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual and can be performed by a NISSANdealer.

Wet brakesWhen the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM


To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS)

WARNING

● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is asophisticated device, but it cannot preventaccidents resulting from careless or dan-gerous driving techniques. It can helpmaintain vehicle control during brakingon slippery surfaces. Remember that stop-ping distances on slippery surfaces will belonger than on normal surfaces even withABS. Stopping distances may also be lon-ger on rough, gravel or snow coveredroads, or if you are using tire chains. Al-ways maintain a safe distance from thevehicle in front of you. Ultimately, thedriver is responsible for safety.

● Tire type and condition may also affectbraking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size and typeas specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See “Tire andLoading Information label” in the“Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls thebrakes so the wheels do not lock during hardbraking or when braking on slippery surfaces.The system detects the rotation speed at eachwheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-vent each wheel from locking and sliding. Bypreventing each wheel from locking, the systemhelps the driver maintain steering control andhelps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Self-test featureThe ABS includes electronic sensors, electricpumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic feature thattests the system each time you start the engineand move the vehicle at a low speed in forward orreverse. When the self-test occurs, you may heara “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and does not indicate amalfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates theABS warning light on the instrument panel. Thebrake system then operates normally, but withoutanti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during theself-test or while driving, have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer.


Normal operationThe ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to roadconditions.

When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels areclose to locking up, the actuator rapidly appliesand releases hydraulic pressure. This action issimilar to pumping the brakes very quickly. Youmay feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear anoise from under the hood or feel a vibration fromthe actuator when it is operating. This is normaland indicates that the ABS is operating properly.However, the pulsation may indicate that roadconditions are hazardous and extra care is re-quired while driving.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system usesvarious sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions,the VDC System helps to perform the followingfunctions:

● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheelslip on one slipping drive wheel so power istransferred to a non slipping drive wheel onthe same axle.

● Controls brake pressure and engine outputto reduce drive wheel slip based on vehiclespeed (traction control function).

● Controls brake pressure at individual wheelsand engine output to help the driver maintaincontrol of the vehicle in the following condi-tions:

– understeer (vehicle tends to not followthe steered path despite increased steer-ing input)

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due tocertain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintaincontrol of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss ofvehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the indi-cator in the instrument panel flashes so note thefollowing:

● The road may be slippery or the system maydetermine some action is required to helpkeep the vehicle on the steered path.

● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedaland hear a noise or vibration from under thehood. This is normal and indicates that theVDC system is working properly.

● Adjust your speed and driving to the roadconditions.

See “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) off indicator light” in the ”Instru-ments and controls” section.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, theand indicator lights come on in the instru-ment panel. The VDC system automatically turnsoff when these indicator lights are on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDCsystem. The indicator illuminates to indi-cate the VDC system is off.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM


When the VDC switch is used to turn off thesystem, the VDC system still operates to preventone drive wheel from slipping by transferringpower to a non slipping drive wheel. Theindicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDCfunctions are off and the indicator will notflash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to onwhen the ignition switch is placed in the offposition then back to the on position.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine and move the vehicle forward or in reverseat a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

WARNING

● The VDC system is designed to help thedriver maintain stability but does notprevent accidents due to abrupt steer-ing operation at high speeds or by care-less or dangerous driving techniques.Reduce vehicle speed and be especiallycareful when driving and cornering onslippery surfaces and always drivecarefully.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,bushings and wheels are not NISSANrecommended for your vehicle or areextremely deteriorated, the VDC systemmay not operate properly. This couldadversely affect vehicle handling per-formance, and the indicator may

flash or both the and indi-cator lights may illuminate.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are extremelydeteriorated, the VDC system may notoperate properly and both theand the indicator lights mayilluminate.

● If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, both the andindicator lights may illuminate.

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the VDC system may not operate prop-erly and the indicator may flash or

both the and indicatorlights may illuminate. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

● When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the indicator may flash or

both the and indicatorlights may illuminate. This is not a mal-function. Restart the engine after driv-ing onto a stable surface.

● If wheels or tires other than the NISSANrecommended ones are used, the VDCsystem may not operate properly andthe indicator may flash or both

the and indicator lights mayilluminate.

● The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snowcovered road.


FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole or use the remote keyless entry function onthe Intelligent Key.

ANTI-FREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not use your engine block heaterwith an ungrounded electrical systemor a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-riously injured by an electrical shock ifyou use an ungrounded connection.

● Disconnect and properly store the en-gine block heater cord before startingthe engine. Damage to the cord couldresult in an electrical shock and cancause serious injury.

● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plugthe extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded110-VAC outlet. Failure to use theproper extension cord or a groundedoutlet can result in a fire or electricalshock and cause serious personalinjury.

Engine block heaters are available throughNISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperaturestarting. The engine block heater should be usedwhen the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) orlower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine blockheater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into agrounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extensioncord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged infor at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outsidetemperatures, to properly warm the enginecoolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn theengine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-erly store the cord to keep it away frommoving parts.


MEMO


6 In case of emergency

Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-14

To shut off the engine in an emergency situationwhile driving, perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switchfor more than 2 seconds.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-sure of all tires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit, and the CHECKTIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicleinformation display, one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is beingdriven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti-vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressurewarning light. This system will activate only whenthe vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). For more details, refer to“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”in the “Instruments and controls” section, and“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the“Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Shift the manual transmission into R(Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the manual transmission isshifted into R (Reverse), or the CVT isshifted into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks �1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire�2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

WCE0044

In case of emergency 6-3

Getting the spare tire and toolsOpen the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting andspare tire cover. Remove the jack �1 and wheelnut wrench �2 from the tool box.

SedanLCE0137

CoupeWCE0200

SedanWCE0193


Turn the clamp to remove the spare tire. Removethe spare tire.

Removing the bolt-on wheel cover (ifso equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-sult in personal injury.

The wheel covers are held on by the wheel nuts.The wheel cover will be removed along with thewheel when the nuts are removed.

To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod �Bas illustrated.

Apply cloth �A between the wheel and jack rod toprevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover orwheel surface.

CoupeWCE0201 LCE0183


Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

Jack-up point coupeWCE0147

Jack-up point sedanWCE0160


Always refer to the proper illustrations for thecorrect placement and jack-up points for yourspecific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.Align the jack head between the two

notches in the front or the rear as shown.Also fit the groove of the jack head betweenthe notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod with both hands. Carefully raise thevehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-move the wheel nuts, and then remove thetire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

LCE0020 WCE0056


4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated (�A , �B , �C , �D ,�E ). Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the tireand loading information label affixed to thedriver side center pillar.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-ment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floorcarpeting over the damaged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep allsparks and flames away from thebattery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

JUMP STARTING


● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-lector to N (Neutral) (manual transmission)or to P (Park) (Continuously Variable Trans-mission). Switch off all unnecessary electri-cal systems (lights, heater, air conditioner,etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-lustrated (�A , �B , �C , �D ).

WCE0054


CAUTION

● Always connect positive (�) to positive(�) and negative (�) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

CAUTION

● Do not push start this vehicle. Thethree-way catalyst may be damaged.

● Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) models cannot be push-started ortow-started. Attempting to do so maycause transmission damage.

● For manual transmission (M/T) models,never try to start the vehicle by towingit. When the engine starts, the forwardsurge could cause the vehicle to collidewith the tow vehicle.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading), or ifyou feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc., take the following steps.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiatorcap is removed, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causing seriousinjury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift selectorto N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P(Park) (CVT).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air conditionertemperature control to maximum hot and fancontrol to high speed.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS


3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir withthe engine running. Add coolant to the en-gine coolant reservoir, if necessary. Haveyour vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany of these conditions apply, dollies ora flatbed tow truck must be used.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE


For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSANNISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (front) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

�A (CVT)�B (M/T)

WCE0194


CAUTION

● Never tow Continuously Variable Trans-mission (CVT) models with the frontwheels on the ground or four wheels onthe ground (forward or backward), asthis may cause serious and expensivedamage to the transmission. If it is nec-essary to tow the vehicle with the rearwheels raised always use towing dolliesunder the front wheels.

● When towing Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) models with thefront wheels on towing dollies, or whentowing manual transmission (M/T)models with the front wheels on theground:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition, and secure the steeringwheel in a straight-ahead positionwith a rope or similar device.

– Move the shift selector to the N (Neu-tral) position.

● When towing Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) or manual trans-mission models (M/T) with the rearwheels on the ground (if you do not usetowing dollies): Always release theparking brake.

● Observe the following restricted towingspeeds and distances for manual trans-missions (M/T) only:

– Speed: Below 50 MPH (80 km/h)

– Distance: Less than 50 miles (80 km)

�A (CVT)�B (M/T)

WCE0195


VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

Pulling a stuck vehicle

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-sonal injury or death when recovering astuck vehicle:

● Contact a professional towing serviceto recover the vehicle if you have anyquestions regarding the recoveryprocedure.

● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to towor free a stuck vehicle.

● Only use devices specifically designedfor vehicle recovery and follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

● Always pull the recovery device straightout from the front of the vehicle. Neverpull at an angle.

● Route recovery devices so they do nottouch any part of the vehicle except theattachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., usea tow strap or other device designed specifically forvehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’sinstructions for the recovery device.

Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing orvehicle recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control Sys-tem.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and D (Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low)and R (Reverse) (M/T models).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R (Reverse) and D(Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low) and R(Reverse) (M/T models).

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.

LCE0138


7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not use car washes that use acid inthe detergent. Some car washes, espe-cially brushless ones, use some acid forcleaning. The acid may react with someplastic vehicle components, causingthem to crack. This could affect theirappearance, and also could cause themnot to function properly. Always checkwith your car wash to confirm that acidis not used.

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing isrecommended to remove built-up wax residueand to avoid a weathered appearance beforere-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated. GLASS

When cleaning the rear window, it may be easierto clean if the high-mounted stop light (if soequipped) is removed first.

Be careful when removing the high-mountedstop light to reduce the risk of damaging thehigh-mounted stop light wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light:

�1 Push toward rear of vehicle.

�2 Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be properlyreinstalled before driving your vehicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if soequipped)

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-ened in a mild soap solution, especially duringwinter months in areas where road salt is used. Ifnot removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:

● Do not use a cleaner that uses strongacid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

WAI0005

Appearance and care 7-3

● Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same as am-bient temperature.

● Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes after thecleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tiredressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating tothe tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it mayreact with the coating and form a compound. Thiscompound may come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-ing on the tire dissolves more easily thanwith an oil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be difficult toremove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl andleather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with adry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order tomaintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-tectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hotsteam cleaners) on the seat. This candamage the seat or occupant classifica-tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-tion of the air bag system and result inserious personal injury.

CLEANING INTERIOR


CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents or ammonia-based cleaners asthey may damage the leather’s naturalfinish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affectthe vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,take the following precautions:

● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-manent discoloration when they contact ve-hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-ener in a location that allows it to hang freeand not contact an interior surface.

● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip onthe vents. These products can cause imme-diate damage and discoloration whenspilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-structions before using the air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference thatmay result in a collision or injury:

● NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-other floor mat in the driver frontposition.

● Use only genuine NISSAN floor matsspecifically designed for use in your ve-hicle model. See your NISSAN dealerfor more information.

● Properly position the mats in the floor-well using the floor mat positioning aid.See �Floor mat positioning aid� in thissection.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-tained with regular cleaning and replaced if theybecome excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aidThis vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket toact as a floor mat positioning aid. GenuineNISSAN floor mats have been specially designedfor your vehicle model. The driver’s and passen-ger’s side floor mats have a grommet hole incor-porated in them. Position the mat by placing thefloor mat bracket hook through the floor matgrommet hole while centering the mat in thefloorwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

LPD0477


SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing and whereatmospheric pollution exists and road salt isused.

TemperatureHigh temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollutionIndustrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CORROSION PROTECTION


CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.

License plate bracket padding

1. License plate

2. Trunk

3. License plate frame

4. Padding

CAUTION

A license plate frame could vibrate andcause noise or paint damage. To avoiddamage or noise, add a soft adhesive padwith a maximum thickness of 1/8 in (4mm) to the back lower edge of the licenseplate frame.

LAI2001


8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Clutch fluid (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Brake pad wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28Front park/turn/sidemarker light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

Upper tether anchor/key cylinder covers . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Removing covers from rear parcel shelf . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Installing covers to rear parcel shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42

Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47

Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-mum maintenance requirements with long ser-vice intervals to save you both time and money.However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’sgood mechanical condition, as well as its emis-sions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide”. You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “ * ” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsand engine hood operate properly. Also ensurethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.Make sure that the secondary latch keeps thehood from opening when the primary latch isreleased.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checkingthe tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten ifnecessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)transmitter components Replace the TPMStransmitter grommet seal, valve core and capwhen the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or thevehicle seems to take longer to stop, see aNISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mataway from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)P (Park) position mechanism On a fairlysteep hill, check that the vehicle is held securelywith the shift selector in the P (Park) positionwithout applying any brakes.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely heldon a fairly steep hill with only the parking brakeapplied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraintsmove up and down smoothly and the lock knobs(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched posi-tions.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid lev-els* Make sure that the brake and clutch fluidlevel is between the MIN and MAX lines on thereservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell ofexhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See “Ex-haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Startingand driving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkthe level when the fluid is cold, with the engineoff. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areaswhere mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.


When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. For manual transmissionmodels, move the shift selector to N(Neutral). For CVT models, move theshift selector to P (Park).

● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFFor LOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models, the fuelfilter or fuel lines should be serviced bya NISSAN dealer because the fuel linesare under high pressure even when theengine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

● Never leave the engine or the CVT re-lated component harness connectordisconnected while the ignition switchis in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may comeon at any time without warning, even ifthe ignition key is in the OFF positionand the engine is not running. To avoidinjury, always disconnect the negativebattery cable before working near thefan.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-der information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS


QR25DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model)4. Air cleaner5. Fuse block6. Battery7. Fuse/Fusible link box8. Engine oil dipstick9. Radiator cap10. Drive belt location11. Engine coolant reservoir12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI0553

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


VQ35DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model)4. Air cleaner5. Fuse block6. Battery7. Fuse/Fusible link box8. Engine oil dipstick9. Radiator cap10. Drive belt location11. Engine coolant reservoir12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI0552


The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith a pre-diluted mixture of 50% GenuineNISSAN Engine Coolant (blue) and 50% waterto provide year-round anti-freeze and coolantprotection. The anti-freeze solution contains rustand corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cool-ing system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

● Never use any additives in the coolantsuch as radiator sealer in the coolingsystem. This may cause damage toelectrical equipment such as the motorand inverter.

● When adding or replacing coolant, besure to use only Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) orequivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-dilutedto provide antifreeze protection to -34°F (-37° C). If additional freeze protec-tion is needed due to weather whereyou operate your vehicle, add GenuineNISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant(blue) concentrate following the direc-tions on the container. If an equivalentcoolant other than Genuine NISSANLong Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) isused, follow the coolant manufacturer’sinstructions to maintain minimum anti-freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). Theuse of other types of coolant solutionsother than Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalentmay damage the engine coolingsystem.

● The life expectancy of the factory-fillcoolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-ant other than Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-ing Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green), or the useof non-distilled water will reduce thelife expectancy of the factory-fill cool-ant. Refer to the Nissan Service andMaintenance Guide for more details.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM


CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level �B , add coolant to the MAX level�A . If the reservoir is empty, check the coolantlevel in the radiator when the engine is cold. Ifthere is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill theradiator with coolant up to the filler opening andalso add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level �A .

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy ofthe factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant orthe use of non-distilled water will reduce the lifeexpectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to theNISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide formore details.

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

LDI0554


CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks �B . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark �A , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill �C .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

QR25DE engineLDI0555

VQ35DE engineLDI0556 WDI0214

ENGINE OIL


CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler �A cap by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug�B .

5. Remove the drain plug �B with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” in this section.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

QR25DEWDI0492

VQ35DEWDI0493


WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual fordrain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter �A .

4. Loosen the oil filter �A with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise. Thenremove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

QR25DEWDI0494


CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface witha clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the sealing surface of theengine. Failure to do so could lead toengine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

CAUTION

● Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT FluidNS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.

● Using transmission fluid other thanGenuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 willdamage the CVT, which is not coveredby the warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid isrequired, we recommend your NISSAN dealer forservicing.

VQ35DEWDI0495

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if soequipped)


The fluid level should be checked using the HOTMAX range on the power steering fluid reservoirat fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on thepower steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu-ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAXdepending on system fluid temperature. Removethe cap and fill through the opening.

CAUTION

● DO NOT OVERFILL.

● Recommended fluid is GenuineNISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For further brake and clutch fluid specificationinformation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake and clutchsystems. The use of improper fluids candamage the brake and clutch systemand affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.

● Clean the filler cap before removing.

● Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous andshould be stored carefully in markedcontainers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

LDI0557

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)FLUID


BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid level is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add Genuine NISSANSuper Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be addedfrequently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

CLUTCH FLUID (if so equipped)Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level isbelow the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN SuperHeavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluidup to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre-quently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

For further brake and clutch fluid specificationinformation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the lowwindshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, liftthe cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

LDI0558 LDI0558 LDI0579

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID


Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount ofwindshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for windshield-washer fluid.This may result in damage to the paint.

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluidreservoir with washer fluid concen-trates at full strength. Some methyl al-cohol based washer fluid concentratesmay permanently stain the grille ifspilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the windshield-washer fluid reser-voir. Do not use the windshield-washerfluid reservoir to mix the washer fluidconcentrate and water.

● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.Clean the battery with a solution of bakingsoda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames, anelectrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-gen gas generated by the battery is ex-plosive. Explosive gases can causeblindness or injury. Do not allow batteryfluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabricsor painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid cancause blindness or injury. After touch-ing a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● Do not tip the battery. Keep the ventcaps tight and the battery level.

BATTERY


1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver asshown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstallthe vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0224

WDI0529


CAUTION

● Do not ground accessories directly tothe battery terminal. Doing so will by-pass the variable voltage control sys-tem and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely.

● Use electrical accessories with the en-gine running to avoid discharging thevehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltagecontrol system. This system measures theamount of electrical discharge from the batteryand controls voltage generated by the generator.

The current sensor �A is located near the batteryalong the negative battery cable. If you add elec-trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure toground them to a suitable body ground such asthe frame or engine block area.

1. Power steering fluid pump pulley2. Water pump pulley3. Generator4. Air conditioner5. Crankshaft pulley6. Drive belt Automatic tensioner

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in theOFF or LOCK position before servicingdrive belt. The engine could rotateunexpectedly.

LDI0694

QR25DE engineWDI0673

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROLSYSTEM

DRIVE BELT


1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusualwear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt isin poor condition or is loose, have it replacedor adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-tion and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule found in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

1. Power steering fluid pump pulley2. Idler pulley3. Generator4. Air conditioner5. Idler pulley6. Crankshaft pulley7. Drive belt Automatic tensioner

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped �Aspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceplatinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-gapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

VQ35DE engineWDI0721 SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS


WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

NOTE:

The air cleaner filter should not be cleanedand reused.

Replace the air cleaner filter according to themaintenance log shown in the “Warranty Informa-tion and Maintenance Booklet.”

To remove the air cleaner filter:

�1 Unlatch the clips and move the air cleanercover upward.

�2 Remove the air cleaner filter.

�3 Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous-ing and the cover with a damp cloth.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, makesure the air cleaner cover is seated in thehousing and latch the clips.

QR25DELDI0563

VQ35DELDI0562

AIR CLEANER


WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTERThe in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the glove box. Refer to the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” forchange intervals.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer.

CLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washerfluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is cleanif beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinsethe blades with clear water. If your windshield isstill not clear after cleaning the blades and usingthe wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

�2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

�3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in thegroove.

WDI0594

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES


6. Return the wiper to its original position andrelease it until it has made contact with thewindshield.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful notto let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle�A . This may cause clogging or improper wind-shield washer operation. If wax gets into thenozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin �B .

If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjustevery time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does notreturn to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

WDI0570

BRAKES


Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

Two types of fuses are used. Type �A is used inthe fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type�B is used in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. Theyare stored in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-partment and passenger compartment fuseboxes.

If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,the type A fuse will not be level with the fusepocket as shown in the illustration. This will notaffect the performance of the fuse. Make sure thefuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in theunderhood fuse boxes.

LDI0455 LDI0457

FUSES


ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock in the passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open �A , replace it with a newfuse �B .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not operate andfuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks. If any of these fusible links are melted,replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

LDI0560 WDI0452


PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open �A , replace it with anequivalent good fuse �B .

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

WDI0402Type A

WDI0452


Extended storage switchIf any electrical equipment does not operate,remove the extended storage switch and checkfor an open fuse.

NOTE:

The extended storage switch is used forlong term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-tended storage switch is broken it is notnecessary to replace it. Replace only theopen fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

How to replace the extended storage switch:

1. To remove the extended storage switch, besure the ignition switch is in the OFF orLOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFFposition.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs �1 found on eachside of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out from thefuse box �2 .

Type BLDI0456 LDI2035


CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallowthe battery or removed parts.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-gent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver �A into the slit �Bof the corner and twist it to separate theupper part from the lower part. Use a cloth toprotect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-lent.

● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-tric terminals as doing so could cause amalfunction.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holdingthe battery across the contact points willseriously deplete the storage capacity.

● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-tom of the case.

LDI2001

BATTERY REPLACEMENT


4. Close the lid securely as illustrated �C �D .

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance forreplacement.

FCC Notice:

For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation. Note: Changes

or modifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

For Canada:This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

HEADLIGHTSReplacing the xenon headlight bulb (ifso equipped)

WARNING

cHIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they pro-duce a high voltage. To prevent an electricshock, never attempt to modify or disas-semble. Always have your xenon head-lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. Foradditional information, see “Headlightand turn signal switch” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb(if so equipped)The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-cause the headlight assembly must be removedfrom the vehicle for bulb replacement, see yourNISSAN dealer.

WDI0568

LIGHTS


CAUTION

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

● Do not leave the headlight assemblyopen without a bulb installed for a longperiod of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,etc. entering the headlight body mayaffect bulb performance. Remove thebulb from the headlight assembly justbefore a replacement bulb is installed.

● Only touch the base when handling thebulb. Never touch the glass envelope.Touching the glass could significantlyaffect bulb life and/or headlightperformance.

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● Use the same number and wattage asshown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of theexterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. Atemperature difference between the inside andthe outside of the lens causes the fog. This is nota malfunction. If large drops of water collectinside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

FRONT PARK/TURN/SIDEMARKERLIGHTBulb replacement requires the removal of theheadlight assembly. If replacement is required,see your NISSAN dealer.


EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*1

Headlight assembly *2

Low (Halogen) 55 H11Low (Xenon) 35 D2RHigh 65 H9Park 5 WY5WPark/Turn 28/8 3457NAK

SidemarkerSedan 5 WY5WCoupe 5 W5W

Front fog light (if so equipped) *2 55 H11Step light 3.8 194Rear combination light

Tail/Stop 27/8 3157KTurn 27 3156

Backup (reversing)Sedan 18 921LFCoupe 13 912

License plate light *2 5 W5WHigh-mounted stop light *2

Inside (coupe) — LEDInside (sedan) 18 921Spoiler (if so equipped) — LED

Front map light 8 U89Rear personal light 8 U88Trunk light 3.4 158Vanity mirror light — HTU–14vMirror-mounted turn signal light (if so equipped) — LEDGlove box light *2 — —Console light *2 — —

*1 Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

*2 See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.


Coupe

1. Mirror-mounted turn signal light(if so equipped)

2. Interior light3. Map light4. Headlamp assembly5. Fog light (if so equipped)6. Step light7. High-mount stoplight8. Trunk light9. License plate light10. Rear combination light

WDI0626


Sedan

1. Rear map light2. Front map light3. Step light4. Headlamp assembly5. Fog light (if so equipped)6. High-mount stoplight (if so equipped)7. Trunk light8. Spoiler mounted stoplight

(if so equipped)9. Rear combination light10. License plate light11. Mirror-mounted turn signal light

(if so equipped)

WDI0680


Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lightand/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing.

WDI0306

Step lightLDI0341


Use a cloth to protect the housing. Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing.Map light

WDI0723

Personal light (if so equipped)WDI0670

Interior lightWDI0632


Rear combination light

To access the bulbs in the rear combination light:

�1 Remove the fasteners. Carefully push backthe carpet.

�2 Remove the 2 nuts and pull out the rearcombination light.

�3 Rotate the bulb(s) counterclockwise andpull out to remove:

�A Turn signal light

�B Sidemarker light

�C Tail/stop light

�D Backup light

WDI0635


CAUTION

Never force the covers into place becausethe hinge pins can be damaged. Followthe removal and installation instructionsto prevent inoperability of the covers.

REMOVING COVERS FROM REARPARCEL SHELFRemove the top tether anchor cover or key cylin-der cover as follows:

1. Lift the cover to the full open position.

Trunk lightWDI0343 LDI2009

UPPER TETHER ANCHOR/KEYCYLINDER COVERS


2. Rotate the cover in the direction shown,disengaging the hinge at �1 and slide thesecond pin from the hinge �2 and removethe cover.

INSTALLING COVERS TO REARPARCEL SHELF

CAUTION

Make sure that the hinge is completelyaligned with the pin. If the pin is forcedinto position, it may break.

Install the top tether anchor cover or key cylindercover as follows:

1. With the pin on one end kept free of its hinge�1 , align the pin of the other end and slide itinto the hinge �2 .

2. With the first pin in position �2 , align thesecond pin with its hinge slot �1 and pushdown on the cover to completely engage it.A snap sound will be heard.

LDI2010 LDI2011 LDI2012


3. Close the cover.

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the“In case of emergency” section of thismanual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit and the CHECK TIREPRESSURE warning appears in the ve-hicle information display, one or more ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-sure warning light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section, “Tire Pressure Monitor-ing System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “Incase of emergency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification labelor the Tire and Loading Information labelunder the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.The Tire and Loading Information label isaffixed to the driver side center pillar. Tirepressures should be checked regularlybecause:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds.

LDI2013

WHEELS AND TIRES


Incorrect tire pressure, including un-der inflation, may adversely affecttire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label. The vehicle weight ca-pacity is indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label. Donot load your vehicle beyond thiscapacity. Overloading your ve-hicle may result in reduced tirelife, unsafe operating conditionsdue to premature tire failure, orunfavorable handling character-istics and could also lead to aserious accident. Loading be-yond the specified capacity mayalso result in failure of other ve-hicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressure gaugeto ensure that the tire pressuresare at the specified level.

● For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.


Tire and loading information label

�1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-ber of occupants that can be seatedin the vehicle.

�2 Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle load-ing information” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section.

�3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

�4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires are cold.Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is set by themanufacturer to provide the best bal-ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up to thevehicle’s GVWR.

�5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” laterin this section.

�6 Spare tire size.

WDI0730


Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingsound of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure,reposition the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add orrelease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

LDI0393


Size Cold Tire Inflation Pres-sure

Front Original Tire P215/60R16 220 kPa, 32 PSIP215/55R17 230 kPa, 33 PSIP235/45R18

Rear Original Tire P215/60R16 220 kPa, 32 PSIP215/55R17 230 kPa, 33 PSIP235/45R18

Spare Tire T135/90R16420 kPa, 60 PSI

T135/90D16

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case of arecall.

ExampleWDI0394


�1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles (not alltires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimeters ofthe tire from sidewall edge to side-wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This numberis the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

ExampleWDI0395


�2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-ment Of Transportation”. The symbolcan be placed above, below or to theleft or right of the Tire IdentificationNumber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional).

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture.

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

�3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-ers also must indicate the materials in thetire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,and others.

�4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sure

This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should be put in the tire. Donot exceed the maximum permissible in-flation pressure.

�5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum loadin kilograms and pounds that can be car-ried by the tire. When replacing the tireson the vehicle, always use a tire that hasthe same load rating as the factory in-stalled tire.

�6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

ExampleWDI0396


�7 The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire hasradial structure.

�8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, IntendedOutboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on theother sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-ward facing sidewall of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mounted on avehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installing


studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Only certain SAE class “S” tire chains canbe used on this vehicle. Using the wrongClass “S” chains on this vehicle will causedamage to the vehicle. If you plan to usetire chains/cables, you should use a tirechain that meets the minimum clearancesfor your vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use a tire chain thatis designed to provide the specified space �Abetween the installed tire chain �1 and where thetire meets the rim �2 as shown on the chart.

Wheel size Minimum space required

16 in .7 in (17 mm)

17 in .2 in (4 mm)

18 in .2 in (4 mm)

A tire chain that provides the specified amount ofspace will provide the necessary clearance be-tween the tire and the closest vehicle suspensionor body component. The minimum clearances aredetermined using the factory-equipped tires.Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chaintensioners when recommended by the tire chainmanufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end linksof the tire chain must be secured or removed toprevent the possibility of whipping action dam-age to the fenders or underbody. If possible,avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tirechains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed.Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/orvehicle handling and performance may be ad-versely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on thefront wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withtire chains in such conditions can cause damageto the various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

LDI0574


CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual for tire re-placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times. Itis recommended that wheel nuts betightened to specification at eachtire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing or objects caught in the tread.If excessive wear, cracks, bulgingor deep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

WDI0258 WDI0259


● The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

● Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not be ob-vious. Replace the tires as neces-sary to prevent tire failure andpossible personal injury.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact a NISSANdealer.


Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, VDC system, ground clear-ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chainclearance, speedometer calibration,headlight aim and bumper height.Some of these effects may lead to acci-dents and could result in serious per-sonal injury.

● If your vehicle was originally equippedwith 4 tires that were the same size andyou are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires ,install the new tires on the rear axle.Placing new tires on the front axle maycause loss of vehicle control in somedriving conditions and cause an acci-dent and personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics, affectthe VDC system and/or interferencewith the brake discs/drums. Such inter-ference can lead to decreased brakingefficiency and/or early brake pad/shoewear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information”section of this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.



● Do not install a damaged or deformedwheel or tire even if it has been re-paired. Such wheels or tires could havestructural damage and could fail with-out warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet.

Care of wheels

● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicleto maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orinvolved in an accident:

WARNING

● The spare tire should be used for emer-gency use only. It should be replacedwith the standard tire at the first oppor-tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-tial damage.

● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving.

● Periodically check spare tire inflationpressure. Always keep the pressure ofthe TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tireat 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY sparetire installed do not drive the vehicle atspeeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire should be used on therear wheels and the original tire usedon the front wheels (drive wheels). Usetire chains only on the front (original)tires.


● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire will wear at a faster ratethan the standard tire. Replace thespare tire as soon as the tread wearindicators appear.

● Do not use the spare tire on othervehicles.

● Do not use more than one spare tire atthe same time.

● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chainswill not fit properly and may cause dam-age to the vehicle.

● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire is smaller than the originaltire, ground clearance is reduced. Toavoid damage to the vehicle, do notdrive over obstacles. Also, do not drivethe vehicle through an automatic carwash since it may get caught.


9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-26Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-27

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and LubricantsUS measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 75.6 See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.Engine oil *8

Drain and RefillWith oil filter change QR25DE 4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6

• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1, *2• Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *1, *2

VQ35DE 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt 4.8Without oil filterchange

QR25DE 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.3VQ35DE 4-3/4 qt 4 qt 4.5

Cooling systemWith reservoir

QR25DE 2 gal 1-3/4 gal 7.7 Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) orequivalentVQ35DE 2-3/8 gal 2 gal 9.0

Manual transmission gear oil — — — Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 orequivalent *3

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 *4Power steering fluid (PSF) — — — Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*5Brake and clutch fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *6 or equivalent DOT 3Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *7Air conditioning system oil — — — Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *7Windshield-washer fluid 1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze

fluid or equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.*2: NISSAN recommends for the VQ35DE engine, Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil available at a NISSAN dealer.*3: If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 is hard to obtain , API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a temporary replacement. However,

use Genuine NISSAN gear oil as soon as it is available.*4 Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by

the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.*5 DEXRON™ VI type ATF may also be used.*6 Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.*7 For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.*8: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-cations where it is available. Many of the automo-bile manufacturers developed this specificationto improve emission control system and vehicleperformance. Ask your service station manager ifthe gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSANsupports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanolwith or without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels ofwhich the oxygenate content and the fuel com-patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-termined. If in doubt, ask your service stationmanager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of suchfuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuelethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 canonly be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Donot use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. governmentregulations require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to be identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbreviation orthe appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tipsUsing unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on level

roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehiclenot specifically designed for E-85 fuelcan damage fuel system componentsand is not covered by the NISSAN newvehicle limited warranty.

● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleadedgasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.


ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, qualityand viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. See “Capacitiesand recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in thissection. NISSAN recommends the use of anenergy conserving oil in order to improve fueleconomy.

Select only engine oils that meet the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-tion mark on the front of the container. Oils whichdo not have the specified quality label should notbe used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oilviscosity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals.”

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-ranty.

WTI0183


Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/Csystem oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil willcause severe damage to the air condition-ing system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.


ENGINE

Model QR25DE VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHCCylinder arrangement 4-cylinder in-line 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)Displacement cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488) 213.45 (3,498)Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speedM/TCVT (in “N” position) No adjustment is necessary.Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idlespeed)CO % at idle

Spark plug DILKAR6A-11 FXE22HR-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS


WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)

Aluminum/Steel 16 x 7J 1.77 (45)

Aluminum 17 x 7.5J 1.77 (45)

Aluminum 18 x 7.5JJ 1.77 (45)

T type (Spare) 16 x 4T 1.57 (40)

Tire size P215/60R16

P215/55R17

P235/45R18

Spare tire Alloy T135/90R16T135/90D16

Steel T135/90R16T135/90D16

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Coupe Sedan

Overall length in (mm) 180.9 (4,595) 190.7 (4,844)Overall width in (mm) 70.7 (1,795) 70.7 (1,795)Overall height in (mm) 56.0 (1,423) 58.0 (1,473)Front track in (mm) 61.0 (1,550) 61.0 (1,550)Rear track in (mm) 61.2 (1,554) 61.1 (1,551)Wheelbase in (mm) 105.3 (2,675) 109.3 (2,775)

Gross vehicle weightrating

lb (kg)See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-bel” on the center pillar between the driver’s sidefront and rear doors.

Gross axle weight ratingFront lb (kg)Rear lb (kg)


When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

LTI0025 WTI0037

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: Gross VehicleWeight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Reviewit carefully.

QR25DEWTI0096

VQ35DEWTI0049 LTI0197


EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

WTI0189

SedanLTI0224

CoupeLTI0225


AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is affixed tothe underside of the hood as shown.

To mount the front license plate, attach the li-cense plate bracket �1 to the plastic finisher atthe location marks (small dimples) using the two6 mm screws provided.

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment, flu-ids, emergency tools, and spare tireassembly. This weight does not in-clude passengers and cargo.

WTI0178 LTI2013

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION


● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other optionalequipment. This information is lo-cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle. This informa-tion is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum combinedweight of occupants and cargo thatcan be loaded into the vehicle. If thevehicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load. Thisinformation is located on the Tire andLoading Information label.

● Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the subtracted weight ofoccupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo” on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not exceedthe number of occupants shown as“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo”, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight. Examples are shown in the follow-ing illustration.


Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX lbs or XXXkg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX lbsor XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)

ExampleLTI0152


5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.See “Measurement of weights” later inthis section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWRor GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts of your vehiclecan break, tire damage could oc-cur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

● Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longer brak-ing distances. This may cause apremature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failurescaused by overloading are notcovered by the vehicle’swarranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance of yourvehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, driveto a scale and weigh the front and the rearwheels separately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loadsshould not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certification label. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or re-move items to bring all weights below theratings.


WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km). Yourengine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is availableon the website at www.nissanusa.com. Thisguide includes information on trailer towing ca-pability and the special equipment required forproper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart found later in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weightplus its cargo weight.

● When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem must be used.

The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle(including passengers and cargo) plus the totaltrailer load. Towing loads greater than these orusing improper towing equipment could ad-versely affect vehicle handling, braking and per-formance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced for low traction situations (for example,on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0164

TOWING A TRAILER


Temperature conditions can also affect towing.For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outsidetemperatures on graded roads can affect engineperformance and cause overheating. The engineprotection mode, which helps reduce the chanceof engine damage, could activate and automati-cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed maydecrease under high load. Plan your trip carefullyto account for trailer and vehicle load, weatherand road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-ing speed, pull to the side of the road in asafe area. Allow the engine to cool andreturn to normal operation. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures is not covered byNISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadKeep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent ofthe total trailer load or use the trailer tongue loadspecified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongueload must be within the maximum tongue loadlimits shown in the following “TowingLoad/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow forproper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. The GVW equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment. In addition, front or rear GAW mustnot exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

WTI0160 TI1012M


Towing capacities are calculated assuming abase vehicle with driver and any options requiredto achieve the rating. Additional passengers,cargo and/or optional equipment, such as thetrailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle andreduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacityand trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed toconfirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, FrontGAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measuredusing platform type scales commonly found attruck stops, highway weigh stations, buildingsupply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity fortongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all ofthe passengers and cargo that are normallyin the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum tongue load.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weighyour trailer on a scale with all equipment andcargo, that are normally in the trailer when it istowed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is notmore than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shownon the trailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale tomake sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and RearGross Axle Weight are not more than FrontGross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weighton the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need tobe moved or removed to meet the specified rat-ings.

Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighedon a scale - including passengers, cargo andhitch - 4,103 lb. (1861 kg).

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) fromF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -4,203 lb. (1906 kg).

● Maximum Towing Load from “TowingLoad/Specification� chart - 1,000 lb. (454kg).

4,203 lb. (1906 kg) GVWR

– 4,103 lb. (1861 kg) GVW

= 100 lb. (45 kg) Available for tongueweight

1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available fortowing

100 lb. (45 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less thanthe maximum towing capacity due to the passen-ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within thetrailer tongue load specification recommendedby the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue loadbecomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed themaximum tongue weight specification shown inthe “Towing load/specification” chart even if thecalculated available tongue weight is greaterthan 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is lessthan 10% , reduce the total trailer weight tomatch the available tongue weight.


Always verify that available capacities are withinthe required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION

UNIT: lb (kg)

MAXIMUM TOWINGLOAD

1,000 (454)

MAXIMUM TONGUELOAD

100 (45)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached tothe vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or prop-erty damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specificweight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-pable of towing a trailer heavier than theweight rating of the hitch components.Never exceed the weight rating of thehitch components. Doing so can causeserious personal injury or propertydamage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weightrating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped onmost trailer couplers. Most hitch balls alsohave the size printed on the top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based onthe trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of thehitch ball must be matched to the ball mounthole diameter. The hitch ball shank shouldbe no more than 1/16” smaller than the holein the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must belong enough to be properly secured to theball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount andthe ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.Choose a proper class ball mount based on thetrailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount shouldbe chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with theground.

Sway control deviceSudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffetingcaused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-dling. Sway control devices may be used to helpcontrol these affects. If you choose to use one,contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to makesure the sway control device will work with thevehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-tem. Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using the swaycontrol device.

Class I hitchClass I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg).


You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment thathas a 2,000 lb (907 kg) maximum weight rating tothe vehicle, but your vehicle is only capable oftowing the maximum trailer weights shown in theTowing Load/Specification chart earlier in thissection.

CAUTION

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

● The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thereceiver when not in use.

● After the hitch is removed, seal the boltholes to prevent exhaust fumes, wateror dust from entering the passengercompartment.

● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load ratingand proper inflation pressure shouldbe in accordance with the trailer andtire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains shouldbe crossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turningcorners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights whileusing the vehicle tail light, stoplight andturn signal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no morethat 15 milliamps from the stop and taillamp circuits. Using a module/converterthat exceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-tain the proper equipment and to have itinstalled.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer dealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed.


WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a levelposition when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Keep the cargo load as low as possible inthe trailer to keep the trailer center of gravitylow.

● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of thetrailer load is in the front half and 40% is inthe back half. Also make sure the load isbalanced side to side.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, andtrailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach atrailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicleand trailer so the required clearance isknown.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin orlock to prevent the coupler from inadver-tently becoming unlatched.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want thetrailer to go. Make small corrections andback up slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope is notrecommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhillside of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowlyrelease the brake pedal until the blocks ab-sorb the vehicle load.


5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.


To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer areclear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

● While going downhill, the weight of thetrailer pushing on the tow vehicle may dete-riorate overall handling characteristics.Therefore, to maintain adequate control, re-duce your speed and shift to a lower gear.Avoid long or repeated use of the brakeswhen descending a hill, as this reduces theireffectiveness and could cause overheating.Shifting to a lower gear instead provides“engine braking” and reduces the need tobrake as frequently.

● If the engine coolant temperature rises to ahigh temperature, refer to “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emergency”section of this owner’s manual.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you dotow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed bylarger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal toallow the vehicle to coast and steer asstraight ahead as the road conditions allow.This combination will help stabilize the ve-hicle

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering orapplying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply thebrakes and pull to the side of the road in asafe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-anced as described earlier in this section.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer mustalso pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-mission to a lower gear for engine brakingwhen driving down steep or long hills. Thiswill help slow the vehicle without applyingthe brakes.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

● NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-trol not be used while towing a trailer.


● Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for vehicles thatare towing trailers. Obey the local speedlimits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe orrear bumper.

● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lightsbefore backing the trailer into the water orthe trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, see the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any continuously variabletransmission vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-sion parts due to lack of transmissionlubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Manual Transmission (if so equipped)● Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

● After towing 500 miles (805 km), start andidle the engine with the transmission in Neu-tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engineafter every 500 miles (805 km) of towingmay cause damage to internal transmissionparts.

Continuously Variable Transmission (ifso equipped)To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuouslyvariable transmission, an appropriate vehicledolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’sdrive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-turer’s recommendations when using their prod-uct.


DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of thetire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING


Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with othervehicle warranties in your Warranty InformationBooklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.If you did not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with othervehicle warranties in your Warranty InformationBooklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.If you did not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform Transport Canada in additionto notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints,it may open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-port Canada cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s De-fect Investigations and Recalls Divisiontoll free at 1-800-333-0510. You mayalso report safety defects online at:https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS


Additional information concerning motorvehicle safety may be obtained from Trans-port Canada’s Road Safety InformationCentre at 1-800-333-0371 or online atwww.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concernsplease contact our Consumer InformationCentre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired orthe battery is disconnected, the vehicle may bereset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking theI/M test, check the vehicle’sinspection/maintenance test readiness condi-tion. Place the ignition switch in the ON positionwithout starting the engine. If the MalfunctionIndicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/Mtest condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does notblink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is“ready”. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the“ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle fortesting.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data that will assist in understand-ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDRis designed to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in thisvehicle is designed to record such data as:

● How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;

● Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;

● How far (if at all) the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

● How fast the vehicle was traveling.

● Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded byyour vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and no personal data(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data with

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)


the type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-ment is required and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have the special equip-ment, can read the information if they have ac-cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will onlybe accessed with the consent of the vehicleowner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-mitted by law.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory-trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model yearand prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION


MEMO


10 IndexA

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System). . . . . . . .5-25Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49

Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-55, 2-14Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-21Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-28Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19, 4-26Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-28

Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-25Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-99Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-11Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-25Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29

Bluetooth� audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93Compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-52, 4-63, 4-69

FM-AM radio with compact disc(CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player. .4-59FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48, 4-54

Audio SystemiPod� Player. . . . . . . . . .4-78, 4-80, 4-82Music Box� hard-disk drive audiosystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85

Audio systemRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29

Audio SystemSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60

Audio systemUSB interface . . . . . . . . .4-71, 4-73, 4-75

Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Automatic

Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-45Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-16

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-31Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47, 4-53

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Block heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Bluetooth� audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93Bluetooth� hands-free phonesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100, 4-114Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-25Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-30Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-16, 8-22Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-19Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . . . .4-12Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-10Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30

C

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-96CD player(See audio system) . . . .4-46, 4-52, 4-63, 4-69Check tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Child restraints . . . . . . .1-20, 1-21, 1-22, 1-24

Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . .1-22, 1-28, 1-33, 1-37Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-26

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45, 4-50

(models with navigation system) . . . . . . .4-8(models without navigation system) . . . .4-45

Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-45Clutch

Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Compact disc (CD) player. . . . . . . .4-46, 4-52,

4-63, 4-69Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-12

Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-16

Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-12Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6

ControlsHeater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19, 4-26

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-9Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 2-40

D

Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-32Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player . . . . . . .4-68Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-33Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Driving with manual transmission . . . . . .5-17Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-11Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-25Engine

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-10Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-12Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-9Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

F

Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . .2-34Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15

10-2

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-10Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-49Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . . . .3-26Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . .2-25, 3-26

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42

H

Hands-free phone system,Bluetooth� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100, 4-114Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-34Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-29Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Heater

Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19, 4-26Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-20, 4-27

HomeLink� Universal Transceiver. . . . . . . .2-51Hood release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

I

Ignition SwitchPush-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . .5-7

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-3, 5-10Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-10In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . . .3-31

Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-33Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-8, 2-2Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-33Intelligent Key system

Key operating range . . . . . . . . . .3-8, 3-19Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Remote keyless entry operation . . .3-12, 3-19Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . .3-16, 3-23Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16, 3-23

Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25iPod� Player . . . . . . . . . . . .4-78, 4-80, 4-82ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8

K

Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . .3-12, 3-19

Keys, For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . .3-2

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10

10-3

Emission control information label . . . . .9-11Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-10Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-55

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . . .9-12Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-55, 2-14Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-30Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-10Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-29Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-30Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-50Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-50Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

LightsMap lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . . . .3-26Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . .3-24

Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-26Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-24Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-12Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-24Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12

M

MaintenanceGeneral maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-33Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-31Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Music Box� hard-disk drive audio system . . .4-85

N

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-3, 5-10NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . .4-125

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-4Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-12Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

10-4

Phone, Bluetooth� hands-freesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100, 4-114Power

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . .1-22, 1-28, 1-33, 1-37Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-13Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-100FM-AM radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player . .4-59FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48, 4-54

Readiness for inspection maintenance(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Rear parcel shelf

Refitting covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37Removing covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36

Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Registering your vehicle in another country . . .9-9Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-25

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6Child seat belts . . . . .1-22, 1-28, 1-33, 1-37Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-25

Seat adjustmentFront manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-4Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8

Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Seat belt

Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-21Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-13Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-18Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-16

Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

SeatsAdjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-2Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8

Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem), engine start . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-3, 5-10Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Shifting

Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-18Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-50SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55Starting

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-10Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

SteeringPower steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

10-5

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-55, 2-14Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-49Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-55Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-40Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-45Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-34Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-29Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-30Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch .2-36Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-3, 5-10Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-49Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-24Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3Towing

Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-19Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16

TransceiverHomeLink� Universal Transceiver. . . . . .2-51

TransmissionContinuously Variable Transmission(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Driving with manual transmission . . . . . .5-17Shift selector lock release. . . . . . . . . .5-16

Travel (See registering your vehicle in anothercountry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Trunk access through the rear seat . . . . . . .1-8Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

U

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-24USB interface

Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . .4-72, 4-75Video file operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-18Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-8Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-36Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-26Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobi-lizer system), engine start . . . . . .2-27, 3-3, 5-10Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . .4-125

W

WarningAir bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-55, 2-14Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-11Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-11Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

10-6

Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-34Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-24Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-50Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-55

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Washer switch

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . .9-8Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8When traveling or registering your vehiclein another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-45Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-27Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

10-7

RECOMMENDED FUEL:Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:● Engine oil with API Certification Mark

● Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:See Tire and Loading Information label.

The label is typically located on the driver sidecenter pillar or on the driver’s door. For additionalinformation, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“Break-in schedule” information found in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-low these recommendations for the future reli-ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

®

2012 ALTIMAOWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2012 N

ISS

AN

ALTIM

AL3

2-D

L32-D

Printing : February 2012 (20)

Publication No.: OM0E 0L32U2

Printed in U.S.A.

OM2E 0L32U2

2012 Altima Owner Manual

Documents

Transcript of 2012 Altima Owner Manual